[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

US20200342901A1 - Magnetic recording medium - Google Patents

Magnetic recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20200342901A1
US20200342901A1 US16/502,399 US201916502399A US2020342901A1 US 20200342901 A1 US20200342901 A1 US 20200342901A1 US 201916502399 A US201916502399 A US 201916502399A US 2020342901 A1 US2020342901 A1 US 2020342901A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
magnetic
layer
recording medium
magnetic recording
medium according
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/502,399
Inventor
Taikei ENOMOTO
Masaru Terakawa
Minoru Yamaga
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sony Corp
Original Assignee
Sony Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sony Corp filed Critical Sony Corp
Priority to US16/684,234 priority Critical patent/US10923148B2/en
Assigned to SONY CORPORATION reassignment SONY CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: YAMAGA, MINORU, ENOMOTO, TAIKEI, TERAKAWA, MASARU
Publication of US20200342901A1 publication Critical patent/US20200342901A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/64Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising only the magnetic material without bonding agent
    • G11B5/66Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising only the magnetic material without bonding agent the record carriers consisting of several layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/48Disposition or mounting of heads or head supports relative to record carriers ; arrangements of heads, e.g. for scanning the record carrier to increase the relative speed
    • G11B5/58Disposition or mounting of heads or head supports relative to record carriers ; arrangements of heads, e.g. for scanning the record carrier to increase the relative speed with provision for moving the head for the purpose of maintaining alignment of the head relative to the record carrier during transducing operation, e.g. to compensate for surface irregularities of the latter or for track following
    • G11B5/584Disposition or mounting of heads or head supports relative to record carriers ; arrangements of heads, e.g. for scanning the record carrier to increase the relative speed with provision for moving the head for the purpose of maintaining alignment of the head relative to the record carrier during transducing operation, e.g. to compensate for surface irregularities of the latter or for track following for track following on tapes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/68Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent
    • G11B5/70Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer
    • G11B5/706Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer characterised by the composition of the magnetic material
    • G11B5/70626Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer characterised by the composition of the magnetic material containing non-metallic substances
    • G11B5/70642Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer characterised by the composition of the magnetic material containing non-metallic substances iron oxides
    • G11B5/70678Ferrites
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/68Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent
    • G11B5/70Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer
    • G11B5/714Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer characterised by the dimension of the magnetic particles
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/68Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent
    • G11B5/70Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer
    • G11B5/716Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer characterised by two or more magnetic layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/73Base layers, i.e. all non-magnetic layers lying under a lowermost magnetic recording layer, e.g. including any non-magnetic layer in between a first magnetic recording layer and either an underlying substrate or a soft magnetic underlayer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/74Record carriers characterised by the form, e.g. sheet shaped to wrap around a drum
    • G11B5/78Tape carriers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/68Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent
    • G11B5/70Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material comprising one or more layers of magnetisable material homogeneously mixed with a bonding agent on a base layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/72Protective coatings, e.g. anti-static or antifriction
    • G11B5/726Two or more protective coatings
    • G11B5/7262Inorganic protective coating
    • G11B5/7264Inorganic carbon protective coating, e.g. graphite, diamond like carbon or doped carbon
    • G11B5/7266Inorganic carbon protective coating, e.g. graphite, diamond like carbon or doped carbon comprising a lubricant over the inorganic carbon coating
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/73Base layers, i.e. all non-magnetic layers lying under a lowermost magnetic recording layer, e.g. including any non-magnetic layer in between a first magnetic recording layer and either an underlying substrate or a soft magnetic underlayer
    • G11B5/735Base layers, i.e. all non-magnetic layers lying under a lowermost magnetic recording layer, e.g. including any non-magnetic layer in between a first magnetic recording layer and either an underlying substrate or a soft magnetic underlayer characterised by the back layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/73Base layers, i.e. all non-magnetic layers lying under a lowermost magnetic recording layer, e.g. including any non-magnetic layer in between a first magnetic recording layer and either an underlying substrate or a soft magnetic underlayer
    • G11B5/7368Non-polymeric layer under the lowermost magnetic recording layer
    • G11B5/7379Seed layer, e.g. at least one non-magnetic layer is specifically adapted as a seed or seeding layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/62Record carriers characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B5/73Base layers, i.e. all non-magnetic layers lying under a lowermost magnetic recording layer, e.g. including any non-magnetic layer in between a first magnetic recording layer and either an underlying substrate or a soft magnetic underlayer
    • G11B5/739Magnetic recording media substrates
    • G11B5/73923Organic polymer substrates
    • G11B5/73927Polyester substrates, e.g. polyethylene terephthalate
    • G11B5/73929Polyester substrates, e.g. polyethylene terephthalate comprising naphthalene ring compounds, e.g. polyethylene naphthalate substrates
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B5/00Recording by magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier; Reproducing by magnetic means; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B5/84Processes or apparatus specially adapted for manufacturing record carriers
    • G11B5/851Coating a support with a magnetic layer by sputtering

Definitions

  • the present technology relates to a magnetic recording medium.
  • X ⁇ Y is 6 ⁇ 10 5 or more if X is 850 kg/mm 2 or greater or less than 850 kg/mm 2 and Y/Z is 6.0 or less when a Young's modulus of a layer in the width direction including a magnetic layer is Z.
  • a dimensional change amount ⁇ w in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N ⁇ w
  • a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer
  • a standard deviation ⁇ PES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal in which the servo pattern is reproduced is ⁇ PES ⁇ 25 nm
  • a maximum value ⁇ 1M of a friction coefficient ⁇ 1 between a surface on a side of the magnetic layer and an LTO3 head in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 is performed 250 times is 0.04 ⁇ 1M ⁇ 0.5.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in a vertical direction.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w may be 700 ppm/N ⁇ w.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w may be 750 ppm/N ⁇ w.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w may be 800 ppm/N ⁇ w.
  • the layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a surface roughness R ab of the back layer may be 3.0 nm ⁇ R ab ⁇ 7.5 nm.
  • the layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a friction coefficient ⁇ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer may be 0.20 ⁇ 0.80.
  • a thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ of the magnetic recording medium may be 5.5 ppm/° C. ⁇ 9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ of the magnetic recording medium may be ⁇ 5.5 ppm/% RH.
  • a Poisson's ratio ⁇ of the magnetic recording medium may be 0.25 ⁇ .
  • An elastic limit value ⁇ MD of the magnetic recording medium in the longitudinal direction may be 0.7 N ⁇ MD .
  • the elastic limit value ⁇ MD of the magnetic recording medium may not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
  • the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, and the magnetic layer may be vertically aligned.
  • the layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness t b of the back layer may be t b ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, and the magnetic layer may be a sputtered layer.
  • an average thickness t m of the magnetic layer may be 9 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 90 nm.
  • the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, and the magnetic layer may contain magnetic powder.
  • the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer may be 35 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 90 nm.
  • the magnetic powder may contain ⁇ iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, the magnetic recording medium may include a back layer, and the surface roughness R ab of the back layer may be 3.0 nm ⁇ R ab ⁇ 7.5 nm.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer and a back layer, and a friction coefficient ⁇ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer may be 0.20 ⁇ 0.80.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, a thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ of 5.5 ppm/° C. ⁇ 9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ of ⁇ 5.5 ppm/% RH.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction and a Poisson's ratio ⁇ of 0.25 ⁇ .
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction and an elastic limit value ⁇ MD of 0.7 N ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction.
  • the elastic limit value ⁇ MD of the magnetic recording medium may not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, and the magnetic layer may be vertically aligned.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, the layer structure includes a back layer on the side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness t b of the back layer is T b ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, and the magnetic layer may be a sputtered layer.
  • an average thickness t m of the magnetic layer may be 9 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 90 nm.
  • the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, and the magnetic layer may contain magnetic powder.
  • the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer may be 35 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 90 nm.
  • the magnetic powder may contain ⁇ iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium according to a first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic particle.
  • FIG. 3A is a perspective view showing a configuration of a measurement device.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic view showing the details of a measurement device.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph showing an example of an SFD curve.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a configuration of a recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic particle in a modification.
  • FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium in a modification.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic view showing a configuration of a sputtering apparatus.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of data bands and servo bands provided on a magnetic recording medium.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a servo pattern in a servo band.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method of measuring PES.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining correction of movement in a width direction of a tape.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a method of measuring a friction coefficient between a magnetic surface and an LTO3 head.
  • a dimensional change may occur in a track width direction.
  • the dimensional change is particularly likely to occur in a case where the magnetic recording medium is stored for a long time.
  • the dimensional change in the width direction may cause an undesirable phenomenon for magnetic recording, such as, for example, an off-track phenomenon, etc.
  • the off-track phenomenon refers to a situation in which a target track is not present at a track position for a magnetic head to read or a situation in which the magnetic head reads a wrong track position.
  • the addition of the layer may increase a thickness of the magnetic recording tape and does not increase a tape length per cartridge product.
  • the inventors of the present technology are examining a magnetic recording medium suitable for use in a recording and reproducing apparatus, whose width may be kept constant or substantially constant by adjusting tension of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium in a longitudinal direction.
  • the recording and reproducing apparatus detects, for example, dimensions or a dimensional change in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium, and adjusts tension in the longitudinal direction on the basis of a detection result.
  • the dimensional change amount in the width direction based on the change in tension in the longitudinal direction is small. Therefore, it is difficult to keep the width of the magnetic recording medium constant or substantially constant even though tension is adjusted in the longitudinal direction by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • the present inventors examined a magnetic recording medium thin and suitable for use in a recording and reproducing apparatus which adjusts tension in a longitudinal direction. As a result, the present inventors have found that a magnetic recording medium having a specific configuration satisfies these requirements.
  • the present technology provides a magnetic recording medium which has a layer structure including a magnetic layer and a base layer, and of which an average thickness t T is t T ⁇ 5.6 ⁇ m, a dimensional change amount ⁇ w in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N ⁇ w, a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer, a standard deviation ⁇ PES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal whose servo pattern is reproduced is ⁇ PES ⁇ 25 nm, and a maximum value ⁇ 1M of a friction coefficient ⁇ 1 when measurement of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 between a surface on a magnetic layer side and an LTO3 head (that is in conformity with LTO3 standard) is performed 250 times is 0.04 ⁇ 1M ⁇ 0.5.
  • PES position error signal
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value is 25 nm or less and a maximum value ⁇ 1M of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 is 0.04 ⁇ 1M ⁇ 0.5 as described above. Because the ⁇ PES and the maximum value ⁇ 1M are within these numerical ranges, running stability of the magnetic recording medium may be improved and, in particular, running stability of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus that adjusts tension of the magnetic recording medium in a longitudinal direction can be improved. For example, in a case where ⁇ PES is too high, linearity of the servo band is low, and thus, it may be difficult to read a servo signal even if tension is adjusted by the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • the magnetic recording medium may slip and this may affect running stability.
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 23 nm or less, more preferably 21 nm or less, and more preferably 18 nm or less.
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 15 nm or more, and more preferably 17 nm or more.
  • the maximum value ⁇ 1M of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the LTO3 head of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 0.05 or more, and more preferably 0.30 or more.
  • the maximum value ⁇ 1M of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the LTO3 head of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 0.48 or less, more preferably 0.45 or less, and still more preferably 0.43 or less.
  • the average thickness t T of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is 5.6 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5.3 ⁇ m or less, and still more preferably 5.2 ⁇ m or less, 5.0 ⁇ m or less, or 4.6 ⁇ m or less.
  • the length of the tape wound up in one magnetic recording cartridge can be longer, thereby increasing a recording capacity per magnetic recording cartridge.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w in the width direction with respect to the change in tension in the longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N or more, more preferably 670 ppm/N or more, and still more preferably 700 ppm/N or more, 710 ppm/N or more, 730 ppm/N or more, 750 ppm/N or more, 780 ppm/N or more, or 800 ppm/N or more.
  • the fact that the magnetic recording medium has the dimensional change amount ⁇ w within the above numerical range contributes to making it possible to maintain the width of the magnetic recording medium at a constant level by adjusting tension of the magnetic recording medium in the longitudinal direction.
  • an upper limit of the dimensional change amount ⁇ w is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 1700000 ppm/N or less, preferably 20000 ppm/N or less, more preferably 8000 ppm/N or less, still more preferably 5000 ppm/N or less, 4000 ppm/N or less, 3000 ppm/N or less, or 2000 ppm/N or less.
  • the layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the magnetic layer side, and a surface roughness R ab of the back layer is preferably 2.5 nm ⁇ R ab ⁇ 7.5 nm, and more preferably 3.0 nm ⁇ R ab ⁇ 7.3 nm.
  • the surface roughness R ab within the above numerical range contributes to improvement of handling properties of the magnetic recording medium.
  • the surface roughness R ab of the back layer is more preferably 7.2 nm or less, and still more preferably 7.0 nm or less, 6.5 nm or less, 6.3 nm or less, or 6.0 nm or less. Furthermore, the surface roughness R ab may be more preferably 3.2 nm or more, and still more preferably 3.4 nm or more. Because the surface roughness R ab is within the above numerical value range, especially, the upper limit value or less, and thus, good electromagnetic conversion characteristic may be achieved in addition to improvement of the handling properties.
  • the magnetic recording medium may be an long-shaped magnetic recording medium and may be a magnetic recording tape (in particular, a long-shaped magnetic recording tape).
  • a magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, a base layer, and a back layer, and may include any other layer in addition to those layers.
  • the other layer may be appropriately selected according to types of magnetic recording medium.
  • the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may be, for example, a coating type magnetic recording medium or a vacuum thin film type magnetic recording medium.
  • the coating type magnetic recording medium will be described in more detail in 2. below.
  • the vacuum thin film type magnetic recording medium will be described in more detail in 3. and 4. below.
  • those descriptions may be referred to.
  • the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may have, for example, at least one data band and at least two servo bands.
  • the number of the data bands may be, for example, 2 to 10, particularly, 3 to 6, and more particularly, 4 or 5.
  • the number of the servo bands may be, for example, 3 to 11, particularly, 4 to 7, and more particularly, 5 or 6.
  • These servo bands and data bands may be arranged, for example, to extend in the longitudinal direction of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium (in particular, a magnetic recording tape), and in particular, to be substantially parallel.
  • the data bands and the servo bands may be provided in the magnetic layer.
  • the magnetic recording media having the data bands and the servo bands may include a magnetic recording tape conforming to the linear tape-open (LTO) standard.
  • the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may be a magnetic recording tape conforming to the LTO standard.
  • the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may be a magnetic recording tape conforming to LTO8 or a later standard (e.g., LTO9, LTO10, LTO11, LTO12, etc.).
  • a width of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium (particularly, magnetic recording tape) according to the embodiment of the present technology may be, for example, 5 mm to 30 mm, particularly, 7 mm to 25 mm, more particularly, 10 mm to 20 mm, and even more particularly, 11 mm to 19 mm.
  • the length of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium (in particular, the magnetic recording tape) may be, for example, 500 m to 1,500 m.
  • a tape width according to the LTO8 standard is 12.65 mm and a length is 960 m.
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 is, for example, a magnetic recording medium subjected to vertical alignment processing, and includes a long-shaped base layer (also referred to as substrate) 11 , a ground layer (non-magnetic layer) 12 provided on one principal plane of the base layer 11 , a magnetic layer (also referred to as a record layer) 13 provided on the ground layer 12 , and a back layer 14 provided on the other principal plane of the base layer 11 as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • a long-shaped base layer also referred to as substrate
  • a ground layer non-magnetic layer
  • a magnetic layer also referred to as a record layer
  • back layer 14 provided on the other principal plane of the base layer 11 as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the plane on which the magnetic layer 13 is provided will be referred to as a magnetic surface
  • the plane opposite to the magnetic surface the plane on which the back layer 14 is provided
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 has an elongated shape and runs in the longitudinal direction during recording and reproducing.
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 may be configured to be able to record a signal at a shortest recording wavelength of preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 75 nm or less, still more preferably 60 nm or less, particularly preferably 50 nm or less, and may be used for, for example, a recording and reproducing apparatus whose shortest recording wavelength is in the above range.
  • the recording and reproducing apparatus may include a ring type head as a recording head.
  • a recording track width is, for example, 2 ⁇ m or less.
  • the base layer 11 may function as a support of the magnetic recording medium 10 , and may be, for example, an elongated flexible non-magnetic substrate, and in particular, may be a non-magnetic film.
  • a thickness of the base layer 11 may be, for example, 2 ⁇ m to 8 ⁇ m, preferably 2.2 ⁇ m to 7 ⁇ m, more preferably 2.5 ⁇ m to 6 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 2.6 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the base layer 11 may contain, for example, at least one of a polyester-based resin, a polyolefin-based resin, a cellulose derivative, a vinyl-based resin, an aromatic polyether ketone resin, or any other polymer resin. In a case where the base layer 11 contains two or more of the above-described materials, the two or more materials may be mixed, copolymerized, or stacked.
  • polyester-based resin may include one or a mixture of two or more of polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polybutylene naphthalate (PBN), polycyclohexylene dimethylene terephthalate (PCT), polyethylene-p-oxybenzoate (PEB), and polyethylenebisphenoxycarboxylate.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PEN polyethylene naphthalate
  • PBT polybutylene terephthalate
  • PBN polybutylene naphthalate
  • PCT polycyclohexylene dimethylene terephthalate
  • PEB polyethylene-p-oxybenzoate
  • polyethylenebisphenoxycarboxylate polyethylenebisphenoxycarboxylate.
  • the base layer 11 may include PET or PEN.
  • the polyolefin-based resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyethylene (PE) and polypropylene (PP).
  • the cellulose derivative may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose acetate butyrate (CAB), and cellulose acetate propionate (CAP).
  • CAB cellulose acetate butyrate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • the vinyl-based resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyvinylidene chloride (PVDC).
  • PVC polyvinyl chloride
  • PVDC polyvinylidene chloride
  • the aromatic polyether ketone resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyether ketone (PEK), polyether ether ketone (PEEK), polyether ketone ketone (PEKK), and polyether ether ketone ketone (PEEKK).
  • PEK polyether ketone
  • PEEK polyether ether ketone
  • PEKK polyether ketone ketone
  • PEEKK polyether ether ketone ketone
  • the base layer 11 may include PEEK.
  • any other polymer resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyamide (PA, nylon), aromatic PA (aromatic polyamide, aramid), polyimide (PI), aromatic PI, polyamide imide (PAI), aromatic PAI, polybenzoxazole (PBO) (e.g., Zylon (registered trademark)), polyether, polyether ester, polyether sulfone (PES), polyether imide (PEI), polysulfone (PSF), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), polycarbonate (PC), polyarylate (PAR), and polyurethane (PU).
  • PA polyamide
  • nylon aromatic PA
  • aromatic PA aromatic polyamide
  • PAI polyamide imide
  • PBO polybenzoxazole
  • the magnetic layer 13 may be, for example, a perpendicular record layer.
  • the magnetic layer 13 may contain magnetic powder.
  • the magnetic layer 13 may further contain, for example, a binder and conductive particles in addition to the magnetic powder.
  • the magnetic layer 13 may further contain, for example, additives such as a lubricant, an abrasive, a corrosion inhibitor, and the like, as necessary.
  • An average thickness t m of the magnetic layer 13 is preferably 35 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 120 nm, more preferably 35 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 100 nm, and particularly preferably 35 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 90 nm.
  • the magnetic layer 13 contributes to improvement of electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer 13 may be obtained as follows. First, a specimen is fabricated by processing the magnetic recording medium 10 perpendicularly to a main surface thereof, and a cross-section of the specimen is observed by a transmission electron microscope (TEM) under the following conditions.
  • TEM transmission electron microscope
  • a thickness of the magnetic layer 13 is measured at positions of at least 10 spots in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 , and thereafter, the measured values are simply averaged (arithmetic mean) to be determined as an average thickness t m (nm) of the magnetic layer 13 .
  • the magnetic layer 13 is preferably a vertically aligned magnetic layer.
  • vertical alignment refers to that a squareness ratio S1 measured in the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is 35% or less. A method of measuring the squareness ratio S1 will be described separately below.
  • the magnetic layer 13 may be a magnetic layer which is in-plane aligned (longitudinal alignment).
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 may be a horizontal recording type magnetic recording medium.
  • vertical alignment is more preferable in terms of higher recording density.
  • Examples of magnetic particles forming magnetic powder contained in the magnetic layer 13 may contain epsilon type iron oxide ( ⁇ iron oxide), gamma hematite, magnetite, chromium dioxide, cobalt-coated iron oxide, hexagonal ferrite, barium ferrite (BaFe), Co ferrite, strontium ferrite, a metal, or the like, but are not limited thereto.
  • the magnetic powder may be one or a combination or two or more thereof.
  • the magnetic powder may contain ⁇ iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • ⁇ iron oxide may contain Ga and/or Al.
  • An average particle size (average maximum particle size) D of the magnetic powder may be preferably 22 nm or less, more preferably 8 nm to 22 nm, and still more preferably 10 nm to 20 nm.
  • the average particle size D of the above magnetic powder is obtained as follows. First, the magnetic recording medium 10 to be measured is processed by a focused ion beam (FIB) method or the like to produce a thin piece, and a cross-section of the thin piece is observed by a transmission electron microscope (TEM). Next, 500 ⁇ iron oxide particles are randomly selected from the captured TEM image, a maximum particle size d max of each particle is measured, and a particle size distribution of the maximum particle size d max of the magnetic powder is obtained.
  • the “maximum particle size d max ” refers to the so-called maximum Feret diameter.
  • the “maximum particle size d max ” refers to a maximum distance among distances between two parallel lines drawn from all angles so as to be in contact with outline of the ⁇ iron oxide particle. Thereafter, a median diameter (50% diameter, D50) of the maximum particle size d max is obtained from the particle size distribution of the obtained maximum particle size d max , and is determined as an average particle size (average maximum particle size) D of the magnetic powder.
  • a shape of the magnetic particles depends on a crystal structure of the magnetic particles.
  • BaFe and strontium ferrites may have a hexagonal plate shape.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide may be spherical.
  • the cobalt ferrite may be cubic.
  • the metal may have a spindle shape.
  • the magnetic powder may contain powder of nanoparticles preferably containing ⁇ iron oxide (hereinafter, referred to as “ ⁇ iron oxide particles”). Even with the fine particles of ⁇ iron oxide particles, high coercive force can be obtained.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide contained in the ⁇ iron oxide particle is preferentially crystal-aligned in a thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particles have a spherical or substantially spherical shape or have a cubic or substantially cubic shape. Since the ⁇ iron oxide particles have the shape as mentioned above, in a case where ⁇ iron oxide particles are used as the magnetic particles, a contact area between particles in a thickness direction of the medium is reduced to thus suppress aggregation of the particles, as compared with a case where barium ferrite particles having a hexagonal plate-like shape are used as magnetic particles. Therefore, dispersibility of the magnetic powder may be increased to thus obtain a better signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particles have a core-shell type structure. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2 , the ⁇ iron oxide particle includes a core portion 21 and a shell portion 22 provided around the core portion 21 and having a two-layer structure.
  • the shell portion 22 having the two-layer structure includes a first shell portion 22 a provided on the core portion 21 and a second shell portion 22 b provided on the first shell portion 22 a.
  • the core portion 21 contains ⁇ iron oxide.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide contained in the core portion 21 preferably has an ⁇ -Fe 2 O 3 crystal as a main phase, and more preferably includes a single phase ⁇ -Fe 2 O 3 .
  • the first shell portion 22 a covers at least a portion of the periphery of the core portion 21 . Specifically, the first shell portion 22 a may partially cover the periphery of the core portion 21 or may cover the entire periphery of the core portion 21 . If exchange coupling of the core portion 21 and the first shell portion 22 a is sufficient and in terms of improvement of magnetic characteristic, the first shell portion 22 a preferably covers the entire surface of the core portion 21 .
  • the first shell portion 22 a is a so-called soft magnetic layer, and may contain, for example, a soft magnetic material such as ⁇ -Fe, a Ni—Fe alloy, an Fe—Si—Al alloy, or the like.
  • ⁇ -Fe may be obtained by reducing the ⁇ iron oxide contained in the core portion 21 .
  • the second shell portion 22 b is an oxide film as an anti-oxidation layer.
  • the second shell portion 22 b may contain a iron oxide, aluminum oxide, or silicon oxide.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide may contain, for example, at least one of Fe 3 O 4 , Fe 2 O 3 , or FeO.
  • the ⁇ -iron oxide may be obtained by oxidizing ⁇ -Fe contained in the first shell portion 22 a.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particles have the first shell portion 22 a as described above, thermal stability may be ensured, whereby the coercive force Hc of the single core portion 21 may be maintained at a large value and/or the overall coercive force Hc of the ⁇ iron oxide particles (core shell particles) may be adjusted to the coercive force Hc appropriate for recording.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particles have the second shell portion 22 b as described above, the ⁇ iron oxide particles are prevented from being exposed in the air during or before the manufacturing process of the magnetic recording medium 10 to cause the particle surfaces to be rusted, or the like, and thus, a degradation of the characteristic of the ⁇ iron oxide particles can be suppressed. Therefore, a degradation of the characteristics of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be suppressed.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particle may have a shell portion 23 having a single layer structure as shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the shell portion 23 has a configuration similar to that of the first shell portion 22 a .
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particle preferably has the shell portion 22 having a two-layer structure.
  • the ⁇ iron oxide particle may contain an additive instead of the core-shell structure, or may have the core-shell structure and may contain the additive as well. In these cases, a part of Fe of the ⁇ iron oxide particle is replaced by the additive. Since the coercive force Hc of the entire ⁇ iron oxide particle may be adjusted to the coercive force Hc suitable for recording also by the ⁇ iron oxide particle containing the additive, ease of recording may be improved.
  • the additive is one or more selected from the group including metal element other than iron, preferably trivalent metal element, more preferably aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and indium (In).
  • the ⁇ iron oxide containing the additive is an ⁇ -Fe 2-x M x O 3 crystal (here, M is one or more selected from the group including metal elements other than iron, preferably trivalent metal elements, more preferably Al, Ga, and In) and x is, for example, 0 ⁇ x ⁇ 1).
  • the magnetic powder may be barium ferrite (BaFe) magnetic powder.
  • the barium ferrite magnetic powder contains magnetic particles of iron oxide containing barium ferrite as a main phase (hereinafter referred to as “barium ferrite particles”).
  • the barium ferrite magnetic powder has high reliability of data recording, for example, in that the coercive force is not lowered even in a high temperature and high humidity environment, and the like. From this viewpoint, barium ferrite magnetic powder is preferable as the magnetic powder.
  • An average particle size of the barium ferrite magnetic powder is 50 nm or less, more preferably 10 nm to 40 nm, and still more preferably 12 nm to 25 nm.
  • an average thickness t m [nm] of the magnetic layer 13 is preferably 35 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 100 nm.
  • the coercive force Hc of the magnetic recording medium 10 measured in a thickness direction (vertical direction) is preferably 160 kA/m to 280 kA/m, more preferably 165 kA/m to 275 kA/m, and still more preferably 170 kA/m to 270 kA/m.
  • the magnetic powder may be cobalt ferrite magnetic powder.
  • the cobalt ferrite magnetic powder contains magnetic particles of iron oxide containing cobalt ferrite as a main phase (hereinafter referred to as “cobalt ferrite magnetic particles”).
  • the cobalt ferrite magnetic particles preferably have uniaxial anisotropy.
  • the cobalt ferrite is cobalt ferrite containing Co.
  • the cobalt ferrite may further contain one or more selected from the group including Ni, Mn, Al, Cu, and Zn in addition to Co.
  • the cobalt ferrite has, for example, an average composition represented by the following Formula (1).
  • M is, for example, one or more metals selected from the group including Ni, Mn, Al, Cu, and Zn; x is a value within a range of 0.4 ⁇ x ⁇ 1.0; y is a value within the range of 0 ⁇ y ⁇ 0.3; however, x and y satisfy the relationship of (x+y) ⁇ 1.0; z is a value within a range of 3 ⁇ z ⁇ 4; a part of Fe may be substituted by another metal element).
  • An average particle size of the cobalt ferrite magnetic powder is preferably 25 nm or less, more preferably 23 nm or less.
  • the coercive force Hc of the cobalt ferrite magnetic powder is preferably 2500 Oe or more, and more preferably 2600 Oe or more and 3500 Oe or less.
  • the magnetic powder may contain powder of nanoparticles containing hexagonal ferrite (hereinafter, referred to as “hexagonal ferrite particles”).
  • the hexagonal ferrite particle has, for example, a hexagonal plate shape or a substantially hexagonal plate shape.
  • the hexagonal ferrite may preferably contain at least one of Ba, Sr, Pb, or Ca, and more preferably at least one of Ba or Sr.
  • the hexagonal ferrite may be, for example, barium ferrite or strontium ferrite.
  • the barium ferrite may further contain at least one of Sr, Pb, or Ca in addition to Ba.
  • the strontium ferrite may further contain at least one of Ba, Pb, or Ca in addition to Sr.
  • the hexagonal ferrite may have an average composition represented by a general formula MFe 12 O 19 .
  • M is, for example, at least one metal of Ba, Sr, Pb, and Ca, preferably at least one metal of Ba and Sr.
  • M may be a combination of Ba and at least one metal selected from the group including Sr, Pb, and Ca.
  • M may be a combination of Sr and one or more metals selected from the group including Ba, Pb, and Ca.
  • part of Fe may be substituted by another metal element.
  • an average particle size of the magnetic powder is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 10 nm to 40 nm, and still more preferably 15 nm to 30 nm.
  • the binder is preferably a resin having a structure in which a crosslinking reaction is given to a polyurethane-based resin, a vinyl chloride-based resin, or the like.
  • the binder is not limited thereto, and any other resins may be appropriately mixed depending on physical properties and the like desired for the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the resin to be mixed is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin generally used in the coating type magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the binder may include, for example, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl acetate, a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, a vinyl chloride-vinylidene chloride copolymer, a vinyl chloride-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-vinyl chloride-vinylidene chloride copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-vinylidene chloride copolymer, a methacrylic acid ester-vinylidene chloride copolymer a methacrylic acid ester-vinyl chloride copolymer, a methacrylic acid ester-ethylene copolymer, a polyvinyl fluoride, vinylidene chloride-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylonitrile-butadiene copolymer, a polyamide resin, polyviny
  • thermosetting resin or a reactive resin may be used, and examples thereof include a phenol resin, an epoxy resin, a urea resin, a melamine resin, an alkyd resin, a silicone resin, a polyamine resin, an urea-formaldehyde resin, and the like.
  • polar functional groups such as, —SO 3 M, —OSO 3 M, —COOM, P ⁇ O(OM) 2 , or the like, may be introduced into each binder described above in order to improve dispersibility of the magnetic powder.
  • M is a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal such as lithium, potassium, sodium, and the like.
  • examples of the polar functional group may include a side chain type having an end group of —NR1R2 and —NR1R2R3 + X ⁇ or a main chain type of >NR1R2 + X ⁇ .
  • R1, R2 and R3 are a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • X ⁇ is a halogen element ion such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or the like, or an inorganic or organic ion.
  • the polar functional group may also include —OH, —SH, —CN, and an epoxy group.
  • the magnetic layer 13 may further contain aluminum oxide ( ⁇ , ⁇ or ⁇ alumina), chromium oxide, silicon oxide, diamond, garnet, emery, boron nitride, titanium carbide, silicon carbide, titanium carbide, titanium oxide (rutile type titanium carbide or anatase type titanium oxide), or the like, as nonmagnetic reinforcing particles.
  • aluminum oxide ⁇ , ⁇ or ⁇ alumina
  • chromium oxide silicon oxide
  • diamond garnet, emery, boron nitride
  • titanium carbide silicon carbide
  • titanium carbide titanium oxide (rutile type titanium carbide or anatase type titanium oxide), or the like, as nonmagnetic reinforcing particles.
  • the ground layer 12 is a nonmagnetic layer containing nonmagnetic powder and a binder as main components.
  • the above description regarding the binder contained in the magnetic layer 13 is also applied to the binder contained in the ground layer 12 .
  • the ground layer 12 may further contain at least one of additives among conductive particles, a lubricant, a curing agent, a rust-preventive agent, and the like, as necessary.
  • An average thickness of the ground layer 12 is preferably 0.6 ⁇ m to 2.0 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m to 1.4 ⁇ m. Note that the average thickness of the ground layer 12 is obtained in a manner similar to that of the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer 13 . However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the ground layer 12 .
  • the nonmagnetic powder contained in the ground layer 12 may include, for example, at least one selected from inorganic particles and organic particles.
  • One kind of nonmagnetic powder may be used alone, or two or more kinds of nonmagnetic powder may be used in combination.
  • the inorganic particles include, for example, one or a combination of two or more selected from metal, metal oxide, metal carbonate, metal sulfate, metal nitride, metal carbide, and metal sulfide. More specifically, the inorganic particles may be, for example, one or two or more selected from iron oxyhydroxide, hematite, titanium oxide, and carbon black.
  • a shape of the nonmagnetic powder may include, for example, various shapes such as a needle shape, sphere shape, cubic shape, plate shape, or the like, but is not particularly limited thereto.
  • the back layer 14 may contain a binder and nonmagnetic powder.
  • the back layer 14 may contain various additives such as a lubricant, a curing agent, an antistatic agent, and the like, as necessary.
  • a lubricant such as a lubricant, a curing agent, an antistatic agent, and the like.
  • the above description of the binder and the nonmagnetic powder contained in the ground layer 12 is also applied to the binder and the nonmagnetic powder contained in the back layer 14 .
  • An average particle size of the inorganic particles contained in the back layer 14 is preferably 10 nm to 150 nm, and more preferably 15 nm to 110 nm.
  • the average particle size of the inorganic particles is obtained in a manner similar to that of the average particle size D of the magnetic powder described above.
  • An average thickness t b of the back layer 14 is preferably t b ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ m. Since the average thickness t b of the back layer 14 is within the above range, even in a case where the average thickness t T of the magnetic recording medium 10 is t T ⁇ 5.5 ⁇ m, the thicknesses of the ground layer 12 and the base layer 11 may be kept thick, whereby running stability of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the recording and reproducing apparatus may be maintained.
  • the average thickness t b of the back layer 14 is obtained as follows. First, a 1 ⁇ 2 inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared and cut into a length of 250 mm to prepare a sample. Next, thicknesses of different spots of the sample are measured at 5 or more points using a laser hologage manufactured by Mitsutoyo Co., Ltd., as a measurement device, and the measured values are simply averaged (arithmetic average) to obtain an average value t T [ ⁇ m].
  • the back layer 14 of the sample is removed with a solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) or diluted hydrochloric acid, and thereafter, thicknesses of different spots of the sample are measured at 5 or more points using the laser hologage and the measured values are simply averaged (arithmetic average) to obtain an average value t B [ ⁇ m]. Thereafter, the average thickness t b [ ⁇ m] of the back layer 14 is obtained by the following equation.
  • MEK methyl ethyl ketone
  • the average thickness t T of the magnetic recording medium 10 is t T ⁇ 5.6 ⁇ m.
  • a recording capacity that can be recorded in one data cartridge can be increased as compared to the related art.
  • a lower limit value of the average thickness t T of the magnetic recording medium 10 is, for example, 3.5 ⁇ m ⁇ t T , but is not particularly limited.
  • the average thickness t T of the magnetic recording medium 10 is obtained by the method of measuring the average value t T described above in the method of measuring the average thickness t b of the back layer 14 .
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w [ppm/N] of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the width direction with respect to a change in tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N ⁇ w, more preferably 670 ppm/N ⁇ w, more preferably 700 ppm/N ⁇ w, more preferably 710 ppm/N ⁇ w, more preferably 730 ppm/N ⁇ w, more preferably 750 ppm/N ⁇ w, still more preferably 780 ppm/N ⁇ w, and particularly preferably 800 ppm/N ⁇ w. If the dimensional change amount ⁇ w is ⁇ w ⁇ 640 ppm/N, it may be difficult to suppress a change in width in the adjustment of longitudinal tension by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • the upper limit value of the dimensional change amount ⁇ w is not particularly limited.
  • ⁇ w ⁇ 1700000 ppm/N preferably ⁇ w ⁇ 20000 ppm/N, more preferably ⁇ w ⁇ 8000 ppm/N, still more preferably ⁇ w ⁇ 5000 ppm/N, ⁇ w ⁇ 4000 ppm/N, ⁇ w ⁇ 3000 ppm/N, or ⁇ w ⁇ 2000 ppm/N.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w may be set to a desired value by selecting a thickness of the base layer 11 and/or a material of the base layer 11 .
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w may be set to a desired value, for example, by adjusting the stretching strength in the vertical and horizontal directions of the film constituting the base layer. For example, ⁇ w decreases more when the film is stretched more strongly in the width direction, and conversely, ⁇ w increases when the film is stretched strongly in the longitudinal direction.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w is obtained as follows. First, a 1 ⁇ 2 inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared and cut into a length of 250 mm to prepare a sample 10 S. Next, loads are applied in order of 0.2 N, 0.6 N, and 1.0 N in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10 S, and widths of the sample 10 S at the loads of 0.2 N, 0.6 N, and 1.0 N are measured. Subsequently, the dimensional change amount ⁇ w is determined from the following equation. Note that the measurement in a case of applying the load of 0.6 N is carried out to check whether an abnormality has not occurred in the measurement (in particular, in order to check whether these three measurement results are linear), and the measurement results are not used in the following equation.
  • D(0.2 N) and D(1.0 N) represent widths of the sample 10 S when 0.2 N and 1.0 N are loaded in the longitudinal direction of sample 10 S, respectively).
  • the widths of the sample 10 S when each load is applied are measured as follows. First, a measurement device shown in FIG. 3A including a digital dimension measuring instrument LS-7000 manufactured by Keyence Corporation is prepared as a measurement device, and the sample 10 S is set in the measurement device.
  • a measurement device shown in FIG. 3A including a digital dimension measuring instrument LS-7000 manufactured by Keyence Corporation is prepared as a measurement device, and the sample 10 S is set in the measurement device.
  • the sample 10 S is placed on five substantially cylindrical and rod-like support members 232 .
  • the sample 10 S is placed on the five support members 232 so that a back surface thereof is in contact with the five support members 232 .
  • the five support members 232 (particularly, surfaces thereof) all include stainless steel SUS304, and surface roughness Rz (maximum height) thereof is 0.15 ⁇ m to 0.3 ⁇ m.
  • the arrangement of the five rod-like support members 232 will be described with reference to FIG. 3B . As shown in FIG. 3B , the sample 10 S is placed on the five support members 232 .
  • the five support members 232 will be referred to as, starting from the side closest to the fixing portion 231 , a “first support member”, a “second support member”, a “third support member” (having a slit 232 A), a “fourth support member”, and a “fifth support member” (closest to a weight 233 ).
  • a diameter of these five support members is 7 mm.
  • a distance d 1 between the first support member and the second support member (in particular, a distance between the centers of these support members) is 20 mm.
  • a distance d 2 between the second support member and the third support member is 30 mm.
  • a distance d 3 between the third support member and the fourth support member is 30 mm.
  • a distance d 4 between the fourth support member and the fifth support member is 20 mm.
  • the second support member, the third support member, and the fourth support member are arranged so that portions of the sample 10 S placed between the second support member, the third support member, and the fourth support member forms a substantially perpendicular plane with respect to the direction of gravity.
  • the third support member is fixed so as not to rotate, while the other four support members are all rotatable.
  • the sample 10 S is held on the support member 232 so as not to move in a width direction of the sample 10 S.
  • the support member 232 positioned between a light emitter 234 and a light receiver 235 and positioned substantially at the center between the fixing portion 231 and a load applying portion has the slit 232 A.
  • Light L is irradiated from the light emitter 234 to the light receiver 235 through the slit 232 A.
  • a slit width of the slit 232 A is 1 mm and the light L may pass through the width, without being blocked by the rim of the slit 232 A.
  • the weight 233 for applying a load of 0.2 N is attached to the other end of the sample 10 S and the sample 10 S is left for 2 hours in the environment. After 2 hours, a width of the sample 10 S is measured. Next, the weight for applying the load of 0.2 N is changed to a weight for applying a load of 0.6 N, and the width of the sample 10 S is measured 5 minutes after the switch. Finally, the weight is changed to a weight for applying a load of 1.0 N, and the width of the sample 10 S is measured 5 minutes after the switch.
  • the load applied in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10 S may be changed.
  • light L is irradiated from the light emitter 234 toward the light receiver 235 , and the width of the sample 10 S to which the load is applied in the longitudinal direction is measured.
  • the measurement of the width is performed in a state where the sample 10 S is not curled.
  • the light emitter 234 and the light receiver 235 are provided in the digital dimension measuring instrument LS-7000.
  • the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ [ppm/° C.] of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably 5.5 ppm/° C. ⁇ 9 ppm/° C., and more preferably 5.9 ppm/° C. ⁇ 8 ppm/° C.
  • a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ is obtained as follows.
  • the sample 10 S is prepared in a manner similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount ⁇ w, the sample 10 S is set in a measurement device similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount ⁇ w, and thereafter, the measurement device is accommodated in a chamber of a predetermined environment controlled at a temperature of 29° C. and relative humidity of 24%.
  • a load of 0.2 N is applied in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10 S, and the sample 10 S was placed in the above environment for 2 hours. Thereafter, with the relative humidity of 24% maintained, widths of the sample 10 S at 45° C., 29° C., and 10° C.
  • the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ is obtained from the following equation.
  • the widths of the sample 10 S are measured at these temperatures 2 hours after each temperature is reached. Note that the measurement at the temperature of 29° C. is carried out in order to check whether an abnormality has not occurred in the measurement (in particular, to check whether these three measurement results are linear) and the measurement results are not used in the following equation.
  • ⁇ ⁇ [ ppm / ° ⁇ C . ] D ⁇ ( 45 ⁇ ° ⁇ ⁇ C . ) ⁇ [ mm ] - D ⁇ ( 10 ⁇ ° ⁇ ⁇ C . ) ⁇ [ mm ] D ⁇ ( 10 ⁇ ° ⁇ ⁇ C . ) ⁇ [ mm ] ⁇ 1 , 000 , 000 ( 45 ⁇ [ ° ⁇ C . ] ) - ( 10 ⁇ [ ° ⁇ C . ] ) [ Equation ⁇ ⁇ 2 ]
  • D(45° C.) and D(10° C.) represent the widths of the sample 10 S at the temperatures of 45° C. and 10° C., respectively).
  • a humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ [ppm/% RH] of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably ⁇ 5.5 ppm/% RH, more preferably ⁇ 5.2 ppm/% RH, and still more preferably ⁇ 5.0 ppm/% RH.
  • a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • the humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ is obtained as follows.
  • the sample 10 S is prepared in a manner similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount ⁇ w and set in a measurement device similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount ⁇ w, and thereafter, the measurement device is accommodated in a chamber of a predetermined environment controlled at a temperature of 29° C. and a relative humidity of 24%.
  • a load of 0.2 N is applied in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10 S, and the sample is left in the environment for 2 hours.
  • widths of the sample 10 S at relative humidity of 80%, 24%, and 10% are measured, while the relative humidity is changed in order of 80%, 24%, and 10%, and a humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ is obtained by the following equation.
  • the widths of the sample 10 S are measured at these humidity immediately after each humidity is reached. Note that the measurement at the humidity of 24% is carried out in order to check whether an abnormality has not occurred in the measurement, and the measurement results are not used in the following equation.
  • D(80%) and D(10%) represent the widths of the sample 10 S at the relative humidity 80% and 10%, respectively).
  • a Poisson's ratio ⁇ of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably 0.25 ⁇ , more preferably 0.29 ⁇ , and still more preferably 0.3 ⁇ .
  • the Poisson's ratio ⁇ is within the above range, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • the Poisson's ratio ⁇ is obtained as follows. First, a 1 ⁇ 2 inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared and cut into a length of 150 mm to prepare a sample, and a mark having a size of 6 mm ⁇ 6 mm is given to the center of the sample. Next, both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the sample are chucked so that a distance between chucks is 100 mm, an initial load of 2 N is applied, a length of the mark in the longitudinal direction of the sample at that time is determined as an initial length and a width of the mark in a width direction of the sample is determined as an initial width.
  • the elasticity limit value ⁇ MD [N] in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably 0.7 N ⁇ MD , more preferably 0.75 N ⁇ MD , and still more preferably 0.8 N ⁇ MD .
  • a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus. Furthermore, it is easier to control a drive side.
  • An upper limit value of the elasticity limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not particularly limited and may be, for example, ⁇ MD ⁇ 5.0 N.
  • the elasticity limit value ⁇ MD does not depend on a speed V when an elastic limit is measured.
  • the elasticity limit value ⁇ MD is set to a desired value, for example, depending on a selection of curing conditions of the ground layer 12 , the magnetic layer 13 , and the back layer 14 , and or a selection of a material of the base layer 11 .
  • a friction coefficient ⁇ between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the surface of the back layer side of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 0.20 ⁇ 0.80, more preferably 0.20 ⁇ 0.78, and still more preferably 0.25 ⁇ 0.75.
  • interlayer friction coefficient ⁇ is preferably 0.20 ⁇ 0.80, more preferably 0.20 ⁇ 0.78, and still more preferably 0.25 ⁇ 0.75.
  • T 1 (N) to T 8 (N) of the movable strain gauge at each outward path when the magnetic recording medium 10 is reciprocated 8 times at 0.5 mm/s is measured, and an average value of T 4 to T 8 is determined as T ave (N). Thereafter, the friction coefficient ⁇ is obtained from the following equation.
  • the surface roughness R ab [nm] (in other words, surface roughness of the back surface) of the back layer 14 is preferably 7.5 nm or less, more preferably 7.2 nm or less, still more preferably 7.0 nm or less, 6.5 nm or less, 6.3 nm or less, or 6.0 nm or less. Furthermore, the surface roughness R ab is preferably 3 nm or more, more preferably 3.2 nm or more, and still more preferably 3.4 nm or more. When the surface roughness R ab of the back layer is within the above range, handling properties of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be improved.
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 when the magnetic recording medium 10 is wound, an influence on the surface of the magnetic layer can be reduced, and thus, an adverse effect on the electromagnetic conversion characteristic can be suppressed.
  • the handling properties and electromagnetic conversion characteristic are contradictory properties, but the surface roughness R ab within the numerical range enables their compatibility.
  • the surface roughness R ab of the back surface is obtained as follows. First, the magnetic recording medium 10 having a width of 1 ⁇ 2 inches is prepared, and the magnetic recording medium 10 is attached to a slide glass, with the back surface facing upward (that is, the magnetic surface is attached to the slide glass) to use it as a sample piece. Next, surface roughness of the back surface of the sample piece is measured by the following non-contact roughness meter using optical interference.
  • Non-contact roughness meter using optical interference (VertScan R5500GL-M100-AC, non-contact surface and layer cross-sectional shape measurement system, manufactured by Ryoka Systems Inc.)
  • Wavelength filter 520 nm
  • surface roughness is measured at positions of at least five spots in the longitudinal direction, and an average value of each arithmetic average roughness Sa (nm), which is automatically calculated from a surface profile obtained at each position, is determined as the surface roughness R ab (nm) of the back surface.
  • the coercive force Hc measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 220 kA/m to 310 kA/m, more preferably 230 kA/m to 300 kA/, still more preferably 240 kA/m to 290 kA/m.
  • the coercive force Hc is 220 kA/m or more, the coercive force Hc becomes a sufficient magnitude, and thus, a degradation of a magnetic signal recorded on an adjacent track due to a leakage magnetic field from the recording head may be suppressed.
  • the coercive force Hc is obtained as follows. First, a measurement sample is cut out from the long-shaped magnetic recording medium 10 and an M-H loop of the entire measurement sample is measured in the thickness direction of the measurement sample (thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 ) using a vibrating sample magnetometer (VSM). Next, the coating film (ground layer 12 , magnetic layer 13 , etc.) is wiped out using acetone, ethanol, or the like, to leave only the base layer 11 for background correction, and the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is measured in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 (the thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 ) using the VSM.
  • VSM vibrating sample magnetometer
  • the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is subtracted from the M-H loop of the entire measurement sample to obtain an M-H loop after background correction.
  • the coercive force Hc is obtained from the obtained M-H loop. Note that it is assumed that the measurement of the M-H loop is entirely performed at 25° C. Furthermore, it is also assumed that “demagnetizing field correction” when the M-H loop is measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • the ratio R is 95% or more, temperature dependence of the coercive force Hc is small, and thus, deterioration of the SNR under a high temperature environment can be suppressed.
  • the coercive force Hc(25) is obtained in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc. Furthermore, the coercive force Hc(50) is obtained in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc except that the M-H loops of the measurement sample and the base layer 11 are all measured at 50° C.
  • the squareness ratio S1 measured in the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 35% or less, more preferably 27% or less, and still more preferably 20% or less.
  • the squareness ratio S1 is 35% or less, vertical alignment of the magnetic powder is sufficiently high, and therefore, a better SNR can be obtained.
  • the perpendicular alignment of the magnetic recording medium may mean that the squareness ratio S1 of the magnetic recording medium is within the above numerical range (for example, 35% or less).
  • the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably perpendicularly aligned.
  • the squareness ratio S1 is obtained as follows. First, a measurement sample is cut out from a long-shaped magnetic recording medium 10 , and an M-H loop of the entire measurement sample corresponding to the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is measured using the VSM. Next, the coating film (ground layer 12 , magnetic layer 13 , etc.) is wiped out using acetone, ethanol, or the like, to leave only the base layer 11 for background correction, and the M-H loop of the base layer 11 corresponding to the longitudinal direction of the base layer 11 (running direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 ) is measured using the VSM.
  • the coating film ground layer 12 , magnetic layer 13 , etc.
  • the squareness ratio S1(%) is calculated by substituting a saturation magnetization Ms(emu) and residual magnetization Mr(emu) of the obtained M-H loop into the following equation. Note that it is assumed that the measurement of the M-H loop is entirely performed at 25° C.
  • the squareness ratio S2 measured in the vertical direction (thickness direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 65% or more, more preferably 73% or more, and still more preferably 80% or more.
  • the squareness ratio S2 is 65% or more, vertical alignment of the magnetic powder is sufficiently high, and thus, a better SNR can be obtained.
  • the perpendicular alignment of the magnetic recording medium may mean that the squareness ratio S2 of the magnetic recording medium is within the above numerical range (for example, 65% or more).
  • the squareness ratio S2 is obtained in a similar manner to the squareness ratio S1 except that the M-H loops are measured in the vertical direction (thickness direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 and the base layer 11 . Note that, in the measurement of the squareness ratio S2, it is assumed that “demagnetizing field correction” when measuring the M-H loop is measured in the vertical direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • the squareness ratios S1 and S2 may be set to a desired value by adjusting, for example, strength of a magnetic field applied to the magnetic layer forming coating material, an application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer forming coating material, a dispersion state of the magnetic powder in the magnetic layer forming coating material, and a concentration of the solid content in the magnetic layer forming coating material. Specifically, for example, as the strength of the magnetic field is increased, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased. Furthermore, as the application time of the magnetic field is longer, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased.
  • the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased. Furthermore, as the concentration of the solid content is lowered, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased.
  • a peak ratio X/Y of a main peak height X and a height Y of a sub peak in the vicinity of magnetic field zero is preferably 3.0 or more, more preferably 5.0 or more, still more preferably 7.0 or more, particularly preferably 10.0 or more, and most preferably 20.0 or more (see FIG. 4 ).
  • the peak ratio X/Y is 3.0 or more, it is possible to suppress inclusion of a large amount of coercive force component (for example, soft magnetic particles, superparamagnetic particles, etc.) unique to ⁇ iron oxide other than the ⁇ iron oxide particles contributing to actual recording in the magnetic powder.
  • An upper limit value of the peak ratio X/Y is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 100 or less.
  • the peak ratio X/Y is obtained as follows. First, an M-H loop after background correction is obtained in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc described above.
  • an SFD curve is calculated from the obtained M-H loop.
  • the calculation of the SFD curve may be performed by using a program attached to the measurement device, or by using other programs.
  • the activation volume V act is preferably 8000 nm 3 or less, more preferably 6000 nm 3 or less, still more preferably 5000 nm 3 or less, particularly preferably 4000 nm 3 or less, and most preferably 3000 nm 3 or less.
  • the activation volume V act is 8000 nm 3 or less, the dispersion state of the magnetic powder is improved, and thus, a bit reversal region can be made steep and a degradation of the magnetization signal recorded on the adjacent track due to a leakage magnetic field from the recording head may be suppressed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a better SNR may not be obtained.
  • the activation volume V act is obtained by the following equation derived by Street&Woolley.
  • V act (nm 3 ) k B ⁇ T ⁇ X irr /( ⁇ 0 ⁇ Ms ⁇ S )
  • the irreversible magnetic susceptibility X irr , the saturation magnetization Ms and the magnetic viscosity coefficient S substituted in the above equation are obtained as follows using the VSM.
  • the measurement direction by the VSM is the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the measurement by the VSM is performed at 25° C. for the measurement sample cut out from the long-shaped magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • “demagnetizing field correction” when the M-H loop is measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • the irreversible magnetic susceptibility X irr is defined as an inclination in the vicinity of the residual coercive force Hr in the inclination of the residual magnetization curve (DCD curve).
  • a magnetic field of ⁇ 1193 kA/m (15 kOe) is applied to the entire magnetic recording medium 10 , and the magnetic field is returned to zero to enter a residual magnetization state.
  • a magnetic field of about 15.9 kA/m (200 Oe) is applied in the opposite direction, and the magnetic field is returned again to zero and a residual magnetization amount is measured.
  • a measurement of applying a magnetic field 15.9 kA/m larger than the immediately previously applied magnetic field and returning the magnetic field to zero is repeatedly performed, and a DCD curve is measured by plotting a residual magnetization amount against the applied magnetic field. From the obtained DCD curve, the point at which the magnetization amount is zero is set as the residual coercive force Hr, and an inclination of the DCD curve in each magnetic field is obtained by differentiating the DCD curve again. In the inclination of the DCD curve, the inclination near the residual coercive force Hr is X irr .
  • an M-H loop of the entire magnetic recording medium 10 (measurement sample) is measured in the thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the coating film (ground layer 12 , magnetic layer 13 , etc.) is wiped out using acetone, ethanol, or the like, to leave only the base layer 11 for background correction, and the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is measured in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 similarly.
  • the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is subtracted from the M-H loops of the entire magnetic recording medium 10 to obtain an M-H loop after background correction.
  • Ms (emu/cm 3 ) is calculated from the value of the saturation magnetization Ms (emu) of the obtained M-H loop and the volume (cm 3 ) of the magnetic layer 13 in the measurement sample. Note that the volume of the magnetic layer 13 is obtained by multiplying the area of the measurement sample by the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 . A method of calculating the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 necessary for calculating the volume of the magnetic layer 13 will be described later.
  • a magnetic field of ⁇ 1193 kA/m (15 kOe) is applied to the entire magnetic recording medium 10 (measurement sample), and the magnetic field is returned to zero to enter a residual magnetization state. Thereafter, in the opposite direction, a magnetic field equivalent to the value of the residual coercive force Hr obtained from the DCD curve is applied. With the magnetic field applied, the magnetization amount is continuously measured at constant time intervals for 1000 seconds. A relationship between the time t and the magnetization amount M(t) thusly obtained is compared with the following equation to calculate the magnetic viscosity coefficient S.
  • M(t) magnetization amount at time t
  • M0 initial magnetization amount
  • S magnetic viscosity coefficient
  • ln(t) natural logarithm of time
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the magnetic surface is preferably 2.5 nm or less, and more preferably 2.0 nm or less.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra is obtained as follows. First, the surface of the side on which the magnetic layer 13 is provided is observed using an atomic force microscope (AFM) (Dimension Icon manufactured by Bruker Corporation) to obtain a cross-sectional profile. Next, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra is obtained from the obtained cross-sectional profile in accordance with JIS B0601: 2001.
  • AFM atomic force microscope
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium 10 according to the present embodiment of the present technology is 25 nm or less, preferably 23 nm or less, and more preferably 20 nm or less.
  • the position error signal indicates a deviation amount (error) of a reading position of the servo pattern in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 when the servo pattern is reproduced (when read) by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 .
  • linearity of a servo band when the servo pattern is read by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 is preferably as high as possible, that is, the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value indicating a deviation amount of the reading position is preferably as low as possible. Because the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium 10 according to the present embodiment of the present technology is low as described above, the linearity of the servo band is high and tension adjustment can be precisely performed.
  • the value of the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value may be set to 25 nm or less by cutting the magnetic recording medium 10 such that an interval between the servo patterns is not changed as much as possible, changing a writing condition of a servo writer when the servo pattern is written into the magnetic recording medium 10 , adjusting friction when the magnetic recording medium 10 and the servo writer slide, and the like, at the time of manufacturing of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • a PES is measured to obtain the standard deviation ⁇ PES.
  • a PES measurement head unit 300 shown in FIG. 12 is prepared.
  • a head for LTO2 (a head in conformity with the LTO2 standard) manufactured by HPE (Hewlett Packard Enterprise) is used.
  • HPE Hewlett Packard Enterprise
  • the head unit 300 has two head parts 300 A and 300 B arranged parallel to each other in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • Each of the head parts includes a plurality of recording heads 340 for recording a data signal on the magnetic recording medium 10 , a plurality of reproducing heads 350 for reproducing a data signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 , and a plurality of servo heads 320 for reproducing the servo signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the recording head 340 and the reproducing head 350 may not be included in the head unit.
  • a servo pattern in a predetermined servo band provided on the magnetic recording medium 10 is reproduced (read) using the head unit 300 .
  • the servo head 320 of the head part 300 A and the servo head 320 of the head part 300 B sequentially face each servo pattern of the predetermined servo band, and the servo pattern is sequentially reproduced by these two servo heads 320 .
  • a portion of the servo pattern recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 which faces the servo head 320 , is read and output as a servo signal.
  • the PES value for each head part is calculated by the following equation for each servo frame.
  • the center line shown in FIG. 12 is a center line of the servo bend.
  • X[ ⁇ m] is a distance between a servo pattern A 1 and a servo pattern B 1 on the center line shown in FIG. 12 and Y[ ⁇ m] is a distance between the servo pattern A 1 and a servo pattern C 1 on the center line shown in FIG. 12 .
  • X and Y may be obtained by developing the magnetic recording medium 10 with FERRICOLLOID developer and using a universal tool microscope (TOPCON TUM-220ES) and a data processing device (TOPCON CA-1B). 50 servo frames are selected at arbitrary positions of the tape in the length direction and X and Y are obtained in each servo frame and a simple average of 50 pieces of data is determined as X and Y used in the above calculation equation.
  • the above difference (B a1 ⁇ A a1 ) indicates a time [sec] on actual path between the two corresponding servo patterns B 1 and A 1 .
  • terms of other difference also indicate the time [sec] on the actual path between the two corresponding servo patterns. These times are obtained from a time between the timing signals obtained from the waveform of the servo signal and a tape running speed.
  • the actual path refer to a position where the servo signal reading head actually runs on the servo signal.
  • is an azimuth angle. ⁇ is obtained by developing the magnetic recording medium 10 with FERRICOLLOID developer and using a universal tool microscope (TOPCON TUM-220ES) and a data processing device (TOPCON CA-1B).
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value is calculated using a servo signal corrected in a movement of the tape in a transverse direction. Furthermore, the servo signal is subjected to high pass filtering to reflect the trackability of the head. In the present technology, the standard deviation ⁇ PES is obtained by using a signal obtained by performing the above correction and the above high pass filtering on the servo signal, which is a so-called written in PES ⁇ .
  • the servo signal is read by the head unit 300 over a certain range of 1 m of a data recording area of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the signals obtained respectively by the heads 300 A and 300 B are subtracted as shown in FIG. 14 to obtain the servo signal corrected in a movement of the tape in the transverse direction.
  • high pass filtering is performed on the corrected servo signal.
  • a recording and reproducing head mounted on the drive moves in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 so as to follow the servo signal by the actuator. Because the written in PES ⁇ is a noise value after adding the trackability of the head in the width direction, the above-mentioned high pass filtering is necessary.
  • the high pass filter is not particularly limited, it is necessary to use a function that can reproduce trackability of the above-mentioned drive head in the width direction.
  • the value of the PES is calculated for each servo frame according to the above calculation equation using the signal obtained by the high pass filtering.
  • the standard deviation (written in PES ⁇ ) of the value of the PES calculated over the above 1 m is the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value in the present technology, and the magnetic recording medium of this technology has a ⁇ PES of 25 nm or less.
  • a maximum value ⁇ 1M of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 is 0.04 ⁇ 1M ⁇ 0.5.
  • the maximum value ⁇ 1M is more preferably 0.05 or more.
  • the maximum value ⁇ 1M is more preferably 0.48 or less.
  • the maximum value ⁇ 1M is calculated by the equation described hereinafter from a measurement value of a movable strain gauge each time when the magnetic recording medium 10 whose magnetic surface is in contact with the LTO3 head is reciprocated 250 times while being slid with respect to the LTO3 head is calculated, and a maximum value of a plurality of calculated friction coefficients ⁇ 1 is ⁇ 1M .
  • the LTO3 head manufactured by Hewlett Packard Enterprise (HPE) is used as the LTO3 head used for measuring ⁇ 1M .
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 can smoothly slide with the head of the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 , and thus, tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction can be adjusted with high precision and the magnetic recording medium 10 can be stably driven. If ⁇ 1M is too large, the magnetic recording medium 10 may not be smoothly slid with respect to the head and width adjustment based on tension adjustment may also be affected. In a case where ⁇ 1M is too small, running stability may be affected by the occurrence of slip.
  • the value of ⁇ 1M may be set, for example, by adjusting the content of the material contained in the magnetic layer 13 (for example, carbon as an additive). For example, as the content of carbon in the magnetic layer 13 increases, ⁇ 1M can be reduced. Therefore, the value of ⁇ PES can be controlled by adjusting the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 by adjusting the content of carbon contained in the magnetic layer 13 .
  • the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 and furthermore, the maximum value ⁇ 1M of ⁇ 1 may be obtained as follows.
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 having a width of 1 ⁇ 2 inches is loaded so that a magnetic surface thereof is in contact with two cylindrical guide rollers having a diameter of 1 inch arranged parallel to and spaced apart from each other.
  • reading of the movable strain gauge in each outward way when the magnetic recording medium 10 slidably reciprocates with respect to the LTO3 head 250 times at 5 mm/s is set to T(N). Thereafter, the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 is obtained from the following equation.
  • ⁇ 1 1 ( ⁇ 1 ⁇ [ ° ] ) ⁇ ( ⁇ / 180 ) ⁇ log e ⁇ ( T ⁇ [ N ] T 0 ⁇ [ N ] ) [ Equation ⁇ ⁇ 7 ]
  • a ground layer-forming coating material is prepared by kneading and/or dispersing a non-magnetic powder, a binder, or the like, in a solvent.
  • the magnetic layer-forming coating material is prepared by kneading and/or dispersing the magnetic powder and the binder in a solvent.
  • the following solvents for example, the following solvents, a dispersing device and a kneading device may be used.
  • solvents used for preparing the above-described coating material include ketone solvents such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, and the like; alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol and propanol; ester solvents such as methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, propyl acetate, ethyl lactate, ethylene glycol acetate, and the like; ether solvents such as diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, 2-ethoxyethanol, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and the like; aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene, toluene and xylene; and halogenated hydrocarbon solvents such as methylene chloride, ethylene chloride, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, chlorobenzene, and the like. One of these may be used, or a mixture of two solvents
  • a kneading device such as a continuous biaxial kneader, a continuous biaxial kneader capable of diluting in multiple steps, a kneader, a press kneader, and a roll kneader may be used but the present technology is not particularly limited thereto.
  • examples of the dispersing device used in the preparation of the coating material preparation described above include roll mills, ball mills, horizontal sand mills, vertical sand mills, spike mills, pin mills, tower mills, pearl mills (for example, DCP Mill, manufactured by Nippon Eirich Co., Ltd., etc.), a homogenizer, an ultrasonic dispersing device, or the like, may be used, but the present technology is not particularly limited thereto.
  • the ground layer-forming coating material is applied to one main surface of the base layer 11 and dried to form the ground layer 12 .
  • the magnetic layer-forming coating material is applied to the ground layer 12 and dried to form the magnetic layer 13 on the ground layer 12 .
  • magnetic powder is magnetically aligned in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 by, for example, a solenoid coil.
  • the magnetic powder may be magnetically aligned in the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the base layer 11 and then magnetically aligned in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 by a solenoid coil.
  • the back layer 14 is formed on the other main surface of the base layer 11 . Accordingly, the magnetic recording medium 10 is obtained.
  • the obtained magnetic recording medium 10 is wound around a large-diameter core again and a curing treatment is performed thereon. Finally, calendering is performed on the magnetic recording medium 10 , and thereafter, the magnetic recording medium 10 is cut into a predetermined width (for example, 1 ⁇ 2 inch width). As a result, a magnetic recording medium 10 of a desired elongated shape may be obtained.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a data band and a servo band formed in a magnetic layer 13 of a magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • FIG. 12 shows the servo pattern of each servo bend.
  • the magnetic layer 13 has four data bands d0 to d3.
  • the magnetic layer 13 has a total of five servo bands S0 to S4 so that each data band is sandwiched by two servo bands.
  • each servo band repeatedly has a servo frame (one servo frame) including five linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns A 1 to A 5 ) that are inclined at a predetermined angle ⁇ , five linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns B 1 to B 5 ) inclined at the same angle in the opposite direction of this signal, four linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns C 1 to C 4 ) inclined at a predetermined angle ⁇ , and four linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns D 1 to D 4 ) inclined at the same angle in the opposite direction of this signal.
  • the predetermined angle ⁇ may be, for example, 5° to 25°, and particularly 11° to 20°.
  • a track width L1 (see FIG. 11 ) of each of the servo bands S0 to S4 may be, for example, 250 ⁇ m or less, particularly 200 ⁇ m or less, and more particularly 150 ⁇ m or less, 130 ⁇ m or less or 110 ⁇ m or less.
  • the track width L1 may be, for example, 70 ⁇ m or more, particularly 80 ⁇ m or more, and more particularly 90 ⁇ m or more.
  • the servo pattern described above is reproduced (read) by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 to be described later and is output as a servo signal.
  • Tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction is adjusted on the basis of the servo signal obtained by reproducing the servo pattern by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 .
  • the above servo pattern is recorded (written) on the magnetic recording medium 10 by the servo writer, for example.
  • the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 has a configuration capable of adjusting tension applied in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 . Furthermore, the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 has a configuration allowing the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10 A to be loaded therein.
  • the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 may be configured so that a plurality of magnetic recording medium cartridges 10 A may be loaded therein.
  • the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 is connected to an information processing device such as a server 41 and a personal computer (hereinafter referred to as “PC”) 42 via a network 43 , and is configured to record data supplied from these information processing devices in the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10 A.
  • the shortest recording wavelength of the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 75 nm or less, still more preferably 60 nm or less, and particularly preferably 50 nm or less.
  • the recording and reproducing apparatus includes a spindle 31 , a reel 32 on the recording and reproducing apparatus side, a spindle driving device 33 , a reel driving device 34 , a plurality of guide rollers 35 , a head unit 36 , a communication interface (I/F) 37 , and a control device 38 .
  • the spindle 31 is configured to mount the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10 A.
  • the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10 A is compliant with the linear tape open (LTO) standard and rotatably accommodates a single reel 10 C, around which the magnetic recording medium 10 is wound to be mounted, in a cartridge case 10 B.
  • LTO linear tape open
  • an inverted V-shaped servo pattern is recorded in advance as a servo signal.
  • the reel 32 is configured to fix a leading end of the magnetic recording medium 10 drawn out from the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10 A.
  • the present technology also provides a magnetic recording cartridge including a magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology.
  • the magnetic recording medium may be wound around, for example, a reel.
  • the spindle driving device 33 is a device for rotationally driving the spindle 31 .
  • the reel driving device 34 is a device for rotationally driving the reel 32 .
  • the spindle driving device 33 and the reel driving device 34 rotationally drive the spindle 31 and the reel 32 to cause the magnetic recording medium 10 to run.
  • the guide roller 35 is a roller for guiding running of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the head unit 36 includes a plurality of recording heads for recording data signals to the magnetic recording medium 10 , a plurality of reproducing heads for reproducing the data signals recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 , and a plurality of servo heads for reproducing a servo signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • a recording head for example, a ring type head may be used, but the type of the recording head is not limited thereto.
  • the communication I/F 37 is for communicating with the information processing device such as the server 41 and the PC 42 , and is connected to the network 43 .
  • the control device 38 controls the entire recording and reproducing apparatus 30 .
  • the control device 38 records the data signal supplied from the information processing device such as the server 41 or the PC 42 to the magnetic recording medium 10 by the head unit 36 in response to a request from the information processing device.
  • the control device 38 reproduces the data signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 by the head unit 36 and supplies the reproduced data signal to the information processing apparatus, in response to the request from the information processing apparatus such as the server 41 and the PC 42 .
  • the control device 38 detects a change in width of the magnetic recording medium 10 on the basis of the servo signal supplied from the head unit 36 .
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 has a plurality of inverted V-shaped servo patterns recorded as servo signals thereon and the head unit 36 simultaneously reproduces two different servo patterns by the two servo heads on the head unit 36 and obtains each servo signal.
  • a position of the head unit 36 is controlled to follow the servo pattern using the servo pattern and relative position information of the head unit obtained from this servo signal.
  • distance information between the servo patterns may be obtained by comparing the two servo signal waveforms.
  • a change in distance between the servo patterns at the time of each measurement may be obtained.
  • a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 may also be calculated.
  • the control device 38 adjusts tension in a longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 so that the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 is a defined width or a substantially defined width by controlling rotation driving of the spindle driving device 33 and the reel driving device 34 on the basis of the change in the distance between the servo patterns obtained as described above or the calculated width of the magnetic recording medium 10 . Accordingly, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be suppressed.
  • the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10 A is attached to the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 , a leading end of the magnetic recording medium 10 is drawn out and transferred to the reel 32 through the plurality of guide rollers 35 and the head unit 36 , and the leading end of the magnetic recording medium 10 is installed on the reel 32 .
  • the spindle driving device 33 and the reel driving device 34 are driven under the control of the control device 38 , and the spindle 31 and the reel 32 are rotated in the same direction so that the magnetic recording medium 10 runs from the reel 10 C toward the reel 32 .
  • the head unit 36 As a result, while the magnetic recording medium 10 is being wound around the reel 32 , information is recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 or information recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 is reproduced by the head unit 36 .
  • the spindle 31 and the reel 32 are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the above direction such that the magnetic recording medium 10 runs from the reel 32 to the reel 10 C. Also, at the time of rewinding, the information is recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 or the information recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 is reproduced by the head unit 36 .
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 has a layer structure includes a magnetic layer 13 and a base layer 11 , and has an average thickness t T is t T ⁇ 5.6 ⁇ m, a dimensional change amount ⁇ w in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N ⁇ w, a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer 13 , a standard deviation ⁇ PES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from the servo signal whose servo pattern is reproduced is ⁇ PES 25 nm, and a maximum value ⁇ 1M of a friction coefficient ⁇ 1 when measurement of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 between a surface on a magnetic layer side and an LTO3 head is performed 250 times is 0.04 ⁇ 1M ⁇ 0.5.
  • PES position error signal
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 may further include a barrier layer 15 provided on at least one surface of the base layer 11 as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the barrier layer 15 is a layer for suppressing a dimensional change in the base layer 11 depending on the environment. For example, moisture absorbency of the base layer 11 is an example of a cause of the dimensional change, and a penetration speed of moisture into the base layer 11 may be reduced by the barrier layer 15 .
  • the barrier layer 15 includes a metal or a metal oxide.
  • the metal for example, at least one of Al, Cu, Co, Mg, Si, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Ni, Zn, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Mo, Ru, Pd, Ag, Ba, Pt, Au, or Ta may be used.
  • metal oxide for example, at least one of Al 2 O 3 , CuO, CoO, SiO 2 , Cr 2 O 3 , TiO 2 , Ta 2 O 5 , or ZrO 2 may be used, and any of the oxides of the above metals may also be used. Furthermore, diamond-like carbon (DLC), diamond, and the like may also be used.
  • DLC diamond-like carbon
  • An average thickness of the barrier layer 15 is preferably 20 nm to 1000 nm, and more preferably 50 nm to 1000 nm.
  • the average thickness of the barrier layer 15 is obtained in a manner similar to the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer 13 .
  • a magnification of the TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to thicknesses of the barrier layer 15 .
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 may be incorporated in a library apparatus.
  • the present technology also provides a library apparatus including at least one magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the library apparatus has a configuration capable of adjusting tension applied in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 , and may include a plurality of the recording and reproducing apparatuses 30 described above.
  • the magnetic recording medium 10 may be attached to servo signal write processing by a servo writer.
  • the servo writer may adjust tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 when recording a servo signal or the like, thereby keeping the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 constant or substantially constant.
  • the servo writer may have a detection device for detecting the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 .
  • the servo writer may adjust the tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 on the basis of a detection result from the detection device.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 is a long, vertical magnetic recording medium and includes a film type base layer 111 , a soft magnetic underlayer 112 (hereinafter referred to as SUL), a first seed layer 113 A, a second seed layer 113 B, a first ground layer 114 A, a second ground layer 114 B, and a magnetic layer 115 as illustrated in FIG. 8 .
  • the SUL 112 , the first and second seed layers 113 A and 113 B, first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 may be, for example, vacuum thin films such as layers formed by sputtering (hereinafter also referred to as “sputtered layer”), or the like.
  • the SUL 112 , the first and second seed layers 113 A and 113 B, and the first and second ground layer 114 A and 114 B are provided between one main surface of the base layer 111 (hereinafter referred to as “surface”) and the magnetic layer 115 , and the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, and the second ground layer 114 B are stacked in this order from the base layer 111 toward the magnetic layer 115 .
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 may further include a protective layer 116 provided on the magnetic layer 115 and a lubricating layer 117 provided on the protective layer 116 as necessary. Furthermore, the magnetic recording medium 110 may further include a back layer 118 provided on the other main surface (hereinafter referred to as “back surface”) of the base layer 111 as necessary.
  • the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 110 (longitudinal direction of the base layer 111 ) is referred to as a machine direction (MD).
  • the machine direction refers to a relative movement direction of a recording and reproducing head with respect to the magnetic recording medium 110 , that is, the direction in which the magnetic recording medium 110 runs at the time of recording and reproduction.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 is preferably used as a storage medium for a data archive, which is expected to increase in demand in the future.
  • This magnetic recording medium 110 may realize a surface recording density of 10 times or more, that is, a surface recording density of 50 Gb/in 2 or more, for example, of the current coating type magnetic recording medium for storage.
  • a large capacity recording of 100 TB or more per data cartridge may be realized.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment is preferably used in a recording and reproducing apparatus (recording and reproducing apparatus for recording and reproducing data) having a ring-type recording head and a giant magnetoresistive (GMR) type reproducing head or a tunneling magnetoresistive (TMR) type reproducing head. Furthermore, it is preferable that the magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment uses a ring-type recording head as the servo signal write head.
  • a data signal is vertically recorded by a ring-type recording head.
  • a servo signal is vertically recorded by the ring-type recording head.
  • the description regarding the base layer 11 in the first embodiment is applied to the base layer 111 , and a description regarding the base layer 111 is thus omitted.
  • the SUL 112 contains a soft magnetic material in an amorphous state.
  • the soft magnetic material includes, for example, at least one of a Co-based material or an Fe-based material.
  • the Co-based material includes, for example, CoZrNb, CoZrTa, or CoZrTaNb.
  • the Fe-based material includes, for example, FeCoB, FeCoZr, or FeCoTa.
  • the SUL 112 is a single-layer SUL, and is provided directly on the base layer 111 .
  • An average thickness of the SUL 112 is preferably 10 nm or more to 50 nm or less, and more preferably 20 nm or more and 30 nm or less.
  • the average thickness of the SUL 112 is obtained by the same method as the method of measuring the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment.
  • average thicknesses of layers other than the SUL 112 as described later (in other words, average thicknesses of first and second seed layers 113 A and 113 B, first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B, and a magnetic layer 115 ) are also obtained by the same method as the method of measuring the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment.
  • a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of each layer.
  • the first seed layer 113 A contains an alloy containing Ti and Cr, and has an amorphous state. Furthermore, this alloy may further contain O (oxygen). The oxygen may be impurity oxygen contained in a small amount in the first seed layer 113 A when the first seed layer 113 A is formed by a film forming method such as a sputtering method or the like.
  • the “alloy” means at least one of a solid solution, a eutectic material, an intermetallic compound, or the like, containing Ti and Cr.
  • the “amorphous state” means a state in which a halo is observed by X-ray diffraction, electron beam diffraction method or the like, and a crystal structure may not be specified.
  • An atomic ratio of Ti to a total amount of Ti and Cr contained in the first seed layer 113 A is preferably 30 atomic % or more and less than 100 atomic %, and more preferably 50 atomic % or more and less than 100 atomic %.
  • a (100) plane of a body-centered cubic lattice (bcc) structure of Cr is aligned, so that there is a possibility that alignment of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B formed on the first seed layer 113 A will be reduced.
  • the atomic ratio of Ti is obtained as follows. Depth direction analysis (depth profile measurement) of the first seed layer 113 A by auger electron spectroscopy (hereinafter referred to as “AES”) is performed while ion-milling the magnetic recording medium 110 from the magnetic layer 115 side. Next, an average composition (average atomic ratio) of Ti and Cr in the film thickness direction is obtained from the obtained depth profile. Next, the atomic ratio of Ti is obtained using the obtained average composition of Ti and Cr.
  • an atomic ratio of 0 to a total amount of Ti, Cr and O contained in the first seed layer 113 A is preferably 15 atomic % or less, and more preferably Is 10 atomic % or less.
  • the atomic ratio of 0 exceeds 15 atomic %, TiO 2 crystals are formed, which affects nucleation of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B formed on the first seed layer 113 A, so that there is a possibility that the alignment of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B will be reduced.
  • the atomic ratio of O is obtained using a method similar to a method of analyzing the atomic ratio of Ti.
  • the alloy contained in the first seed layer 113 A may further contain an element other than Ti and Cr as an additional element.
  • This additional element may be, for example, one or more elements selected from the group including Nb, Ni, Mo, Al, and W.
  • the average thickness of the first seed layer 113 A is preferably 2 nm to 15 nm, and more preferably 3 nm to 10 m.
  • the second seed layer 113 B contains, for example, NiW or Ta, and has a crystalline state.
  • the average thickness of the second seed layer 113 B is preferably 3 nm to 20 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 15 nm.
  • the first and second seed layers 113 A and 113 B have a crystal structure similar to that of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B, and are not seed layers provided for the purpose of crystal growth, but are seed layers improving vertical alignment of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B by amorphous states of the first and second seed layers 113 A and 113 B.
  • the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B have a crystal structure similar as that of the magnetic layer 115 .
  • the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B contain a material having a hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure similar to that of the Co-based alloy and a c axis of the hcp structure is aligned in a direction (that is, film thickness direction) perpendicular to a film surface.
  • hcp hexagonal closest-packed
  • the material having the hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure it is preferable to use a material containing Ru, and specifically, it is preferable to use Ru alone or use a Ru alloy.
  • the Ru alloy can include Ru alloy oxides such as Ru—SiO 2 , Ru—TiO 2 , Ru—ZrO 2 , and the like, and the Ru alloy may be any one of Ru—SiO 2 , Ru—TiO 2 , and Ru—ZrO 2 .
  • first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B can be used as the materials of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B.
  • intended effects of each of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B are different from each other.
  • the second ground layer 114 B has a film structure promoting a granular structure of the magnetic layer 115 which is an upper layer of the second ground layer 114 B, and the first ground layer 114 A has a film structure with a high crystal alignment.
  • film forming conditions such as sputtering conditions or the like of each of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B are made to be different from each other.
  • the average thickness of the first ground layer 114 A is preferably 3 nm to 15 nm or less, and more preferably 5 nm to 10 nm.
  • the average thickness of the second ground layer 114 B is preferably 7 nm to 40 nm, and more preferably 10 nm to 25 nm.
  • the magnetic layer (also referred to as a recording layer) 115 may be a vertical magnetic recording layer in which a magnetic material is vertically aligned. It is preferable that the magnetic layer 115 is a granular magnetic layer containing a Co-based alloy, in terms of improvement of a recording density.
  • the granular magnetic layer contains ferromagnetic crystal particles containing the Co-based alloy and nonmagnetic grain boundaries (nonmagnetic material) surrounding the ferromagnetic crystal particles. More specifically, the granular magnetic layer contains columns (columnar crystal) containing a Co-based alloy and nonmagnetic grain boundaries (for example, oxides such as SiO 2 ) surrounding the columns and magnetically separating the respective columns from each other.
  • the magnetic layer 115 having a structure in which the respective columns are magnetically separated from each other may be configured.
  • the Co-based alloy has a hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure, and a c-axis of the hcp structure is aligned in the direction (film thickness direction) perpendicular to the film surface.
  • hcp hexagonal closest-packed
  • a c-axis of the hcp structure is aligned in the direction (film thickness direction) perpendicular to the film surface.
  • the Co-based alloy it is preferable to use a CoCrPt-based alloy containing at least Co, Cr, and Pt.
  • the CoCrPt-based alloy may further contain an additive element. Examples of the additive element can include one or more elements selected from the group including Ni and Ta.
  • the nonmagnetic grain boundaries surrounding the ferromagnetic crystal grains contain a nonmagnetic metallic material.
  • the metal includes a metalloid.
  • the nonmagnetic metal material for example, at least one of a metal oxide or a metal nitride can be used, and it is preferable to use the metal oxide, in terms of more stable maintenance of the granular structure.
  • the metal oxide can include metal oxides containing one or more elements selected from the group including Si, Cr, Co, Al, Ti, Ta, Zr, Ce, Y, Hf, and the like, and the metal oxide is preferably a metal oxide including at least Si oxide (that is, SiO 2 ).
  • the metal oxide can include SiO 2 , Cr 2 O 3 , CoO, Al 2 O 3 , TiO 2 , Ta 2 O 5 , ZrO 2 , HfO 2 , and the like.
  • the metal nitride can include metal nitrides containing one or more elements selected from the group including Si, Cr, Co, Al, Ti, Ta, Zr, Ce, Y, Hf, and the like.
  • Specific examples of the metal nitride can include SiN, TiN, AlN, and the like.
  • the CoCrPt-based alloy contained in the ferromagnetic crystal particle and the Si oxide contained in the nonmagnetic grain boundary have an average composition represented in the following Formula (1).
  • the reason is because a saturation magnetization amount Ms in which an influence of a demagnetizing field can be suppressed and a sufficient reproduction output can be obtained can be realized, resulting in further improvement of recording and reproduction characteristics.
  • x, y, and z are values within ranges in which 69 ⁇ x ⁇ 75, 10 ⁇ y ⁇ 16, and 9 ⁇ Z ⁇ 12 are satisfied, respectively).
  • composition can be obtained as follows.
  • An average composition (average atomic ratio) of Co, Pt, Cr, Si, and O in the film thickness direction is obtained by performing the depth direction analysis on the magnetic layer 115 by the AES while ion-milling the magnetic recording medium 110 from the magnetic layer 115 side.
  • An average thickness t m [nm] of the magnetic layer 115 is preferably 9 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 90 nm, more preferably 9 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 20 nm, and still more preferably 9 nm ⁇ t m ⁇ 15 nm.
  • the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer 13 is within the above numerical range, so that electromagnetic conversion characteristics can be improved.
  • the protective layer 116 contains, for example, a carbon material or silicon dioxide (SiO 2 ), and it is preferable that the protective layer 116 contains a carbon material in view of film strength of the protective layer 116 .
  • the carbon material include graphite, diamond-like carbon (DLC), diamond, or the like.
  • the lubricating layer 117 contains at least one lubricant.
  • the lubricating layer 117 may further contain various additives, for example, a rust inhibitor, as necessary.
  • a lubricant has at least two carboxyl groups and one ester bond, and contains at least one of carboxylic acid-based compounds represented by the following General Formula (1).
  • the lubricant may further contain a lubricant other than the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by the following General Formula (1).
  • Rf is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group
  • Es is an ester bond
  • R may be absent, but is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated hydrocarbon group
  • carboxylic acid-based compound is represented by the following General formula (2) or (3).
  • Rf is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group).
  • Rf is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group).
  • the lubricant contains one or both of the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by the above General Formulas (2) and (3).
  • the lubricant containing the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by General Formula (1) is coated on the magnetic layer 115 , the protective layer 116 or the like, a lubricating action is exhibited by cohesion between the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon groups or the hydrocarbon groups Rf, which are hydrophobic groups.
  • the Rf group is the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group, it is preferable that a total carbon number is 6 to 50 and a total carbon number of a fluorinated hydrocarbon group is 4 to 20.
  • the Rf group may be, for example, a saturated or unsaturated straight chain, branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon group, but may preferably be a saturated straight chain hydrocarbon group.
  • the Rf group is the hydrocarbon group
  • it is preferable that the Rf group is a group represented by the following General Formula (4).
  • the Rf group is the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group
  • it is preferable that the Rf group is group represented by following General formula (5).
  • n and n are, respectively, integers independently selected from each other within the following ranges: m: 2 to 20, n: 3 to 18, and more preferably m: 4 to 13, n: 3 to 10).
  • the fluorinated hydrocarbon group may be concentrated at one position in the molecule as described above or may be dispersed as in the following General Formula (6), and may be —CHF 2 , —CHF—, or the like, as well as —CF 3 or —CF 2 —.
  • the reason why the number of carbon atoms in General Formulas (4), (5), and (6) is limited as described above is because when the number (l or the sum of m and n) of carbon atoms constituting an alkyl group or a fluorine-containing alkyl group is equal to or more than the above lower limit, a length becomes an appropriate length, so that the cohesion between the hydrophobic groups is effectively exhibited and friction and wear durability is improved. Furthermore, the reason is because when the number of carbon atoms is equal to or less than the above upper limit, solubility in a solvent of a lubricant including the carboxylic acid-based compound is kept good.
  • the Rf group may have a fluoroalkyl ether group or a perfluoropolyether group.
  • R group in General Formula (1) may be absent, but in a case where the R group in General Formula (1) is present, it is preferably a hydrocarbon chain having a relatively small number of carbon atoms.
  • the Rf group or R group contains one element or a plurality of elements selected from the group including nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, and halogen as constituent elements, and may further have a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, and a carbonyl group, an amino group, an ester bond, and the like, in addition to the functional group described above.
  • the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by General Formula (1) is specifically at least one of the compounds shown below.
  • the lubricant contains at least one of the compounds shown below.
  • the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by the General Formula (1) is soluble in a non-fluorinated solvent having a small load on an environment, and has an advantage that an operation such as coating, immersion, spraying, or the like, can be performed using a general-purpose solvent such as, for example, a hydrocarbon-based solvent, a ketone-based solvent, an alcohol-based solvent, an ester-based solvent, and the like.
  • a general-purpose solvent such as, for example, a hydrocarbon-based solvent, a ketone-based solvent, an alcohol-based solvent, an ester-based solvent, and the like.
  • examples of the general-purpose solvent can include hexane, heptane, octane, decane, dodecane, benzene, toluene, xylene, cyclohexane, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, cyclohexanone, and the like.
  • the protective layer 116 contains a carbon material
  • the carboxylic acid-based compound when coated on the protective layer 116 as a lubricant, two carboxyl groups and at least one ester bond group, which are polar group parts of lubricant molecules, can be adsorbed on the protective layer 116 to form a particularly durable lubricating layer 117 by cohesion between hydrophobic groups.
  • the lubricant is held not only on the surface of the magnetic recording medium 110 as the lubricating layer 117 as described above, but may also be contained and held in layers such as the magnetic layer 115 , the protective layer 116 and the like constituting the magnetic recording medium 110 .
  • the description regarding the back layer 14 in the first embodiment is applied to the back layer 118 .
  • the average thickness t T the dimensional change amount ⁇ w, the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ , the humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ , the Poisson's ratio ⁇ , the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction, the friction coefficient ⁇ between the magnetic surface and the back surface, the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value, the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 , the maximum value ⁇ 1M of the magnetic recording medium 110 , and the surface roughness R ab of the back layer 118 may be similar to those in the first embodiment. Therefore, a description of the physical properties and the structure of the magnetic recording medium of the second embodiment are omitted.
  • the sputtering apparatus 120 is a continuous winding type sputtering used for forming the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 , and includes a film forming chamber 121 , a drum 122 , which is a metal can (rotary body), cathodes 123 a to 123 f , a supply reel 124 , a winding reel 125 , and a plurality of guide rolls 127 a to 127 c and 128 a to 128 c , as shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the sputtering apparatus 120 is, for example, an apparatus using a DC (direct current) magnetron sputtering manner, but the sputtering manner is
  • the film forming chamber 121 is connected to a vacuum pump (not shown) through an exhaust port 126 , and the atmosphere in the film forming chamber 121 is set to a predetermined degree of vacuum by the vacuum pump.
  • the drum 122 having a rotatable configuration, the supply reel 124 , and the winding reel 125 are arranged in the film forming chamber 121 .
  • the plurality of guide rolls 127 a to 127 c for guiding conveyance of the base layer 111 between the supply reel 124 and the drum 122 and the plurality of guide rolls 128 a to 128 c for guiding conveyance of the base layer 111 between the drum 122 and the winding reel 125 are provided in the film forming chamber 121 .
  • the base layer 111 unwound from the supply reel 124 is wound around the winding reel 125 through the guide rolls 127 a to 127 c , the drum 122 , and the guide rolls 128 a to 128 c .
  • the drum 122 has a cylindrical shape, and the long base layer 111 is conveyed along a circumferential surface of the cylindrical surface of the drum 122 .
  • the drum 122 is provided with a cooling mechanism (not shown), and is cooled to, for example, about ⁇ 20° C. at the time of the sputtering.
  • a plurality of cathodes 123 a to 123 f is arranged in the film forming chamber 121 so as to face the circumferential surface of the drum 122
  • Target are set on the cathodes 123 a to 123 f , respectively.
  • targets for forming the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 are set on the cathodes 123 a , 123 b , 123 c , 123 d , 123 e , and 123 f , respectively.
  • a plurality of types of films that is, the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 are simultaneously formed by these cathodes 123 a to 123 f.
  • the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 are continuously formed by a RolltoRoll method.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment can be manufactured, for example, as follows.
  • the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 are sequentially formed on a surface of the base layer 111 using the sputtering apparatus 120 shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the films are formed as follows. First, the film forming chamber 121 is evacuated to a predetermined pressure.
  • the targets set on the cathodes 123 a to 123 f are sputtered while a process gas such as an Ar gas or the like is introduced into the film forming chamber 121 Therefore, the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 are sequentially formed on the surface of the traveling base layer 111 .
  • the atmosphere of the film forming chamber 121 at the time of the sputtering is set to, for example, about 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 Pa to 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 5 Pa.
  • Film thicknesses and characteristics of the SUL 112 , the first seed layer 113 A, the second seed layer 113 B, the first ground layer 114 A, the second ground layer 114 B, and the magnetic layer 115 can be controlled by adjusting a tape line speed at which the base layer 111 is wound, a pressure (sputtering gas pressure) of the process gas such as the Ar gas or the like introduced at the time of the sputtering, supplied power, and the like.
  • the protective layer 116 is formed on the magnetic layer 115 .
  • a method of forming the protective layer 116 for example, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method or a physical vapor deposition (PVD) method can be used.
  • CVD chemical vapor deposition
  • PVD physical vapor deposition
  • a binder, inorganic particles, a lubricant, and the like are kneaded and dispersed in a solvent to prepare a coating material for forming a back layer.
  • the back layer 118 is formed on the back surface of the base layer 111 by applying the coating material for forming a back layer on the back surface of the base layer 111 and then drying the coating material.
  • the lubricant is coated on the protective layer 116 to form the lubricating layer 117 .
  • various coating methods such as gravure coating, dip coating and the like can be used.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 is cut into a predetermined width, as necessary. Thus, the magnetic recording medium 110 shown in FIG. 8 is obtained.
  • a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 110 can be suppressed by adjusting tension in a longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 110 by the recording and reproducing apparatus, similar to the first embodiment. For example, even if there is a change in temperature and humidity that may cause a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 110 , the width of the magnetic recording medium 110 can be kept constant or substantially constant. The change in width by the tension adjustment may be suppressed even after long-term storage. Moreover, although the magnetic recording medium 110 is as thin as t T ⁇ 5.6 ⁇ m, the magnetic recording medium 110 is excellent in handling properties.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 may further include a ground layer between the base layer 111 and the SUL 112 . Since the SUL 112 has the amorphous state, the SUL 112 does not play a role of promoting epitaxial growth of a layer formed on the SUL 112 , but is desired not to disturb the crystal alignment of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B formed on the SUL 112 .
  • the soft magnetic material has a fine structure that does not form a column, but in a case where an influence of the release of a gas such as moisture or the like from the base layer 111 is large, the soft magnetic material may be coarsened to disturb the crystal alignment of the first and second ground layers 114 A and 114 B formed on the SUL 112 .
  • the ground layer containing an alloy containing Ti and Cr and an having amorphous state is provided between the base layer 111 and the SUL 112 , as described above.
  • a specific configuration of the ground layer a configuration similar to that of the first seed layer 113 A of the second embodiment can be adopted.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 may not include at least one of the second seed layer 113 B or the second ground layer 114 B. However, it is more preferable that the magnetic recording medium 110 includes both of the second seed layer 113 B and the second base layer 114 B, in terms of improvement a SNR.
  • the magnetic recording medium 110 may include an antiparallel coupled SUL (APC-SUL) instead of the single-layer SUL.
  • API-SUL antiparallel coupled SUL
  • a magnetic recording medium 130 according to a third embodiment includes a base layer 111 , a SUL 112 , a seed layer 131 , a first ground layer 132 A, a second ground layer 132 B, and a magnetic layer 115 , as shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the same parts as those in the second embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals and a description thereof will be omitted.
  • the SUL 112 , the seed layer 131 , and the first and second ground layers 132 A and 132 B are provided between one main surface of the base layer 111 and the magnetic layer 115 , and the SUL 112 , the seed layer 131 , the first ground layer 132 A, and the second ground layer 132 B are sequentially stacked from the base layer 111 toward the magnetic layer 115 .
  • the seed layer 131 contains Cr, Ni, and Fe, and has a face-centered cubic lattice (fcc) structure, and a (111) plane of the face-centered cubic lattice structure is preferentially aligned so as to be parallel with a surface of the base layer 111 .
  • the preferential alignment means a state in which a diffraction peak intensity from the (111) plane of the face-centered cubic lattice structure is larger than diffraction peaks from other crystal planes in a ⁇ -2 ⁇ scan of an X-ray diffraction method or a state in which only the diffraction peak intensity from the (111) plane of the face-centered cubic lattice structure is observed in the ⁇ -2 ⁇ scan of the X-ray diffraction method.
  • An intensity ratio of X-ray diffraction of the seed layer 131 is preferably 60 cps/nm or more, more preferably 70 cps/nm or more, and still more preferably 80 cps/nm or more, in terms of improvement of the SNR.
  • the intensity ratio of the X-ray diffraction of the seed layer 131 is a value (I/D) (cps/nm)) obtained by dividing an intensity I(cps) of the X-ray diffraction of the seed layer 131 by an average thickness D (nm) of the seed layer 131 .
  • the average thickness of the seed layer 131 is 5 nm or more to 40 nm or less.
  • the (111) alignment of the face-centered cubic lattice structure of Cr, Ni, and Fe is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • the average thickness of the seed layer 131 is obtained in a manner similar to that of the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the seed layer 131 .
  • the first ground layer 132 A contains Co and O having a face-centered cubic lattice structure, and has a column (columnar crystal) structure.
  • substantially an effect (function) substantially similar to that of the second ground layer 132 B containing Ru is obtained.
  • a concentration ratio of an average atomic concentration of O to an average atomic concentration of Co is 1 or more. When the concentration ratio is 1 or more, the effect of providing the first base layer 132 A is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • the column structure is inclined in terms of improvement of the SNR. It is preferable that a direction of the inclination is a longitudinal direction of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium 130 .
  • the reason why it is preferable that the direction of the inclination is the longitudinal direction is as follows.
  • the magnetic recording medium 130 according to the present embodiment is a so-called magnetic recording medium for linear recording, and a recording track is parallel with the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130 .
  • the magnetic recording medium 130 according to the present embodiment is also a so-called perpendicular magnetic recording medium, and it is preferable that a crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 is perpendicular in terms of recording characteristics, but an inclination may be generated in the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 due to an influence of an inclination of the column structure of the first ground layer 132 A.
  • the influence of the inclination of the crystal alignment axis on the recording characteristics can be reduced in a configuration in which the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130 as compared with a configuration in which the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 is inclined in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium 130 .
  • the inclination direction of the column structure of the first ground layer 132 A is the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130 as described above.
  • the inclination angle of the column structure is larger than 0° and is 60° or less.
  • a change in a tip shape of the column contained in the first ground layer 132 A is large, so that the tip shape becomes substantially a triangular shape. Therefore, an effect of the granular structure tends to be improved, noise tends to be reduced, and the SNR tends to be improved.
  • the inclination angle exceeds 60°, the change in the tip shape of the column contained in the first foundation layer 132 A is small, so that it is difficult for the tip shape to become substantially a triangular shape. Therefore, a noise reduction effect tends to be degraded.
  • An average particle diameter of the column structure is 3 nm or more to 13 nm or less.
  • the average particle size is less than 3 nm, the average particle size of the column structure included in the magnetic layer 115 is reduced, and thus, there is a possibility that an ability to hold a record with a current magnetic material will be deteriorated.
  • the average particle size is 13 nm or less, the noise is suppressed, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • An average thickness of the first ground layer 132 A is preferably 10 nm or more to 150 nm or less.
  • the average thickness of the first ground layer 132 A is 10 nm or more, (111) alignment of the face-centered cubic lattice structure of the first ground layer 132 A is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • the average thickness of the first ground layer 132 A is 150 nm or less, an increase in a particle diameter of the column can be suppressed. Therefore, the noise is suppressed, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • the average thickness of the first ground layer 132 A is obtained in a manner similar to the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the first ground layer 132 A.
  • the second ground layer 132 B has a crystal structure similar to that of the magnetic layer 115 .
  • the second ground layer 132 B contains a material having a hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure similar to that of the Co-based alloy, and it is preferable that a c-axis of the hcp structure is aligned in a direction (that is, a film thickness direction) perpendicular to a film surface. The reason is because alignment of the magnetic layer 115 can be improved and matching in a lattice constant between the second ground layer 132 B and the magnetic layer 115 can be made relatively good.
  • the material having the hexagonal closest-packed structure it is preferable to use a material containing Ru, and specifically, it is preferable to use Ru alone or use a Ru alloy.
  • the Ru alloy can include an Ru alloy oxide such as Ru—SiO 2 , Ru—TiO 2 , Ru—ZrO 2 , or the like.
  • An average thickness of the second ground layer 132 B may be thinner than that of an ground layer (for example, an ground layer containing Ru) in a general magnetic recording medium, and can be, for example, 1 nm or more to 5 nm or less. Since the seed layer 131 and the first ground layer 132 A having the configurations described above are provided under the second ground layer 132 B, even though the average thickness of the second ground layer 132 B is thin as described above, a good SNR is obtained. Note that the average thickness of the second ground layer 132 B is obtained in a manner similar to the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the second ground layer 132 B.
  • the magnetic recording medium 130 it is possible to keep the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 constant or substantially constant by adjusting tension in a longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 , similar to the first embodiment.
  • the magnetic recording medium 130 includes the seed layer 131 and the first ground layer 132 A between the base layer 111 and the second ground layer 132 B.
  • the seed layer 131 contains Cr, Ni, and Fe, and has a face-centered cubic lattice structure, and a (111) plane of the face-centered cubic structure is preferentially aligned so as to be parallel with a surface of the base layer 111 .
  • the first ground layer 132 A has a column structure in which it contains Co and O, a ratio of an average atomic concentration of O to an average atomic concentration of Co is 1 or more, and an average particle diameter is 3 nm or more to 13 nm or less.
  • Ru contained in the second ground layer 132 B has the same hexagonal closest-packed lattice structure as that of Co, which is a main component of the magnetic layer 115 . Therefore, Ru has an effect of improving the crystal alignment of the magnetic layer 115 and promoting a granular property. Furthermore, in order to further improve the crystal alignment of Ru contained in the second ground layer 132 B, the first ground layer 132 A and the seed layer 131 are provided under the second ground layer 132 B. In the magnetic recording medium 130 according to the third embodiment, an effect (function) substantially similar to that of the second ground layer 132 B containing Ru is realized by the first ground layer 132 A containing cheap CoO having the face-centered cubic lattice structure. Therefore, the thickness of the second ground layer 132 B can be reduced. Furthermore, in order to improve the crystal alignment of the first ground layer 132 A, the seed layer 131 containing Cr, Ni, and Fe is provided.
  • the average thickness t T of the magnetic tape, the dimensional change amount ⁇ w of the magnetic tape in the width direction with respect to a change in tension of the magnetic tape in the longitudinal direction, the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ of the magnetic tape, the humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ of the magnetic tape, the Poisson's ratio ⁇ of the magnetic tape, the elastic limit value ⁇ MD of the magnetic tape in the longitudinal direction, the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer, the squareness ratio S2, the average thickness t b of the back layer, the surface roughness R ab of the back layer, the interlayer friction coefficient ⁇ between the magnetic surface and the back surface, the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value, the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 , and the maximum value ⁇ 1M are values obtained by the measurement method described in the first embodiment.
  • a speed V at the time of measuring an elastic limit value ⁇ MD in a longitudinal direction was set to a value different from the measurement method described in the first embodiment.
  • a magnetic layer-forming coating material was prepared as follows. First, a first composition of the following mixture was kneaded with an extruder. Next, the kneaded first composition and a second composition of the following mixture were added to a stirring tank equipped with a disperser and preliminary mixing was carried out. Subsequently, sand mill mixing was performed again and subjected to filtering to prepare a magnetic layer-forming coating material.
  • Powder of ⁇ iron oxide nanoparticles ( ⁇ -Fe 2 O 3 crystal particles): 100 parts by mass
  • Aluminum oxide powder 5 parts by mass
  • Carbon black 2 parts by mass
  • Vinyl chloride resin 1.1 parts by mass
  • n-Butyl stearate 2 parts by mass
  • a ground layer-forming coating material was prepared as follows. First, a third composition of the following mixture was kneaded by an extruder. Next, the kneaded third composition and a fourth composition of the following mixture were added to a stirring tank equipped with a disper and preliminary mixing was carried out. Subsequently, sand mill mixing was further performed and the mixture was subjected to filtering to prepare a ground layer-forming coating material.
  • Needle-like iron oxide powder 100 parts by mass
  • Vinyl chloride resin 55.6 parts by mass
  • Carbon black 10 parts by mass
  • Polyurethane resin UR8200 (manufactured by TOYO BOSEKI): 18.5 parts by mass
  • n-Butyl stearate 2 parts by mass
  • a back layer-forming coating material was prepared as follows. The following raw materials were mixed in a stirring tank equipped with a disper and subjected to filtering to prepare a back layer-forming coating material.
  • Carbon black (manufactured by Asahi Carbon Co., Ltd., trade name: #80): 100 parts by mass
  • Polyester polyurethane 100 parts by mass
  • Methyl ethyl ketone 500 parts by mass
  • a ground layer having an average thickness of 1.0 ⁇ m and a magnetic layer having an average thickness t m of 90 nm were formed on a long polyethylene naphthalate film (hereinafter referred to as “PEN film”) which is a nonmagnetic support in the following manner.
  • PEN film polyethylene naphthalate film
  • the ground layer-forming coating material was applied to the film and dried to form a ground layer on the film.
  • a magnetic layer-forming coating material was applied to the ground layer and dried to form a magnetic layer on the ground layer. Note that, when the magnetic layer-forming coating material was dried, the magnetic powder was magnetically aligned in a thickness direction of the film by a solenoid coil.
  • the squareness ratio S2 in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape was set to 65% by adjusting an application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer-forming coating material.
  • a back layer having an average thickness t b of 0.6 ⁇ m was applied to the film, on which the ground layer and the magnetic layer were formed, and dried. Then, the film, on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed, was subjected to a curing treatment. Subsequently, calendering was performed to smooth the surface of the magnetic layer.
  • conditions (temperature) for calendering were adjusted so that an interlayer friction coefficient ⁇ of a magnetic surface and a back surface is about 0.5 and re-curing was subsequently performed to obtain a magnetic tape having an average thickness t T of 5.5 ⁇ m.
  • the magnetic tape obtained as described above was cut into a 1 ⁇ 2 inch (12.65 mm) width and wound around a core to obtain a pancake.
  • the 1 ⁇ 2 inch-wide magnetic tape was wound around a reel prepared in the cartridge case to obtain a magnetic recording cartridge.
  • a servo signal was recorded on the magnetic tape by a servo track writer.
  • the servo signal includes rows of inverted V-shaped magnetic patterns, and two or more rows of magnetic patterns are pre-recorded in parallel in the longitudinal direction at a known interval from each other (hereinafter referred to as a “known interval of magnetic pattern rows when pre-recorded”).
  • the magnetic tape obtained as described above had the characteristics shown in Table 1.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w of the magnetic tape was 707 ppm/N
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value was 23 nm
  • ⁇ 1M was 0.05.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the PEN film was made thinner than in Example 1 so that the dimensional change amount ⁇ w was 750 ppm/N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • the average thickness t T of the magnetic tape was 5 ⁇ m, and the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value was 17 nm.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the PEN film was thinner than Example 1 and the average thickness of the back layer and the ground layer was thinner so that the dimensional change amount ⁇ w was 800 ppm/N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the PEN film was thinner than Example 1, the average thickness of the back layer and the ground layer was thinner, and the curing treatment conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed were adjusted so that the dimensional change amount ⁇ w was 800 ppm/N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that the composition of the ground layer-forming coating material was changed so that the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ was 8.0 ppm/° C.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that a thin barrier layer was formed on one side of the PEN film so that the humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ was 3.0 ppm/% RH.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that longitudinal and transverse stretching strengths of the base film were changed so that the Poisson's ratio ⁇ was 0.31.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that the longitudinal and transverse stretching strengths of the base film were changed so that the Poisson's ratio ⁇ was 0.35.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the curing conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed were adjusted so that the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction was 0.8 N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the curing conditions and re-curing conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and back layer were formed were adjusted so that the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction was 3.5 N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 9 A magnetic tape was obtained in a manner similar to that of Example 9. Then, the elastic limit value ⁇ MD of the obtained magnetic tape was measured by changing the speed V when measuring the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction to 5 mm/min. As a result, the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction was 0.8, without any change as compared with the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction at a speed V of 0.5 mm/min (Example 9). As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that a coating thickness of the magnetic layer-forming coating material was changed so that the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer was 40 nm.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a CrPtCoSiO 2 layer (SUL) having an average thickness of 10 nm was formed on a surface of a long polymer film as a nonmagnetic support under the following film formation conditions. Note that a PEN film was used as the polymer film.
  • TiCr layer (first seed layer) having an average thickness of 5 nm was formed on the CoZrNb layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • NiW layer (second seed layer) having an average thickness of 10 nm was formed on the TiCr layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • a Ru layer (first ground layer) having an average thickness of 10 nm was formed on the NiW layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • a Ru layer (second ground layer) having an average thickness of 20 nm was formed on the Ru layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Target (CoCrPt)—(SiO 2 ) target
  • a carbon layer (protective layer) having an average thickness of 5 nm was formed on the magnetic layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Target carbon target
  • a lubricant was applied to the protective layer to form a lubricating layer.
  • a back layer-forming coating material was applied to a surface opposite to the magnetic layer and dried to form a back layer having an average thickness t b of 0.3 ⁇ m.
  • a magnetic tape having an average thickness t T of 4.0 ⁇ m was obtained.
  • the magnetic tape obtained as described above was cut into a 1 ⁇ 2 inch (12.65 mm) width.
  • the magnetic tape obtained as described above had the characteristics shown in Table 1.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w of the magnetic tape was 800 ppm/N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the thickness of the back layer was changed to 0.2 ⁇ m. An average thickness of the magnetic tape was 4.4 ⁇ m. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the composition of the back layer-forming coating material was changed so that the surface roughness R ab of the back layer was 3 nm.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the conditions (temperature) of calendering were adjusted so that the friction coefficient ⁇ was 0.20.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the composition of the back layer-forming coating material was changed so that the surface roughness R ab of the back layer is 3 nm, a condition (temperature) for calendaring was adjusted so that the friction coefficient ⁇ was 0.80, and the amount of carbon black in the magnetic layer was reduced.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the coating thickness of the magnetic layer-forming coating material was changed so that the average thickness t m of the magnetic layer was 110 nm.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the composition of the back layer-forming coating material was changed so that the surface roughness R ab of the back layer was 7 nm.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the conditions (temperature) for calendering were adjusted so that the friction coefficient ⁇ was 0.18.
  • An ⁇ 1M of the magnetic tape was 0.04.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the conditions (temperature) for calendering were adjusted so that the friction coefficient ⁇ was 0.82.
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value of the magnetic tape was 18 nm and ⁇ 1M thereof was 0.45.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the squareness ratio S2 in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape was set to 73% by adjusting the application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer-forming coating material.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the squareness ratio S2 in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape was set to 80% by adjusting the application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer-forming coating material.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the curing conditions and re-curing conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed were adjusted so that the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction was 5 N.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that barium ferrite (BaFe 12 O 19 ) nanoparticles were used instead of ⁇ iron oxide nanoparticles.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the stretching treatment of the PEN film was changed so that the dimensional change amount ⁇ w was 650[ppm/N] and the winding tension in the coating process was increased.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape on which a servo signal was recorded was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the structure of the write head of the servo track writer was changed.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the amount of carbon black in the magnetic layer was reduced.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • a magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the amount of carbon black in the magnetic layer was increased.
  • a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • the magnetic recording tape included in the magnetic recording cartridge As described above, two or more rows of inverted V-shaped magnetic patterns are pre-recorded in the longitudinal direction at a known interval from each other (“the known interval of the magnetic pattern rows when pre-recorded”).
  • the magnetic recording tape in each magnetic recording cartridge was reciprocated in the recording and reproducing apparatus. Then, at the time of reciprocation running, two or more rows of the above-mentioned inverted V-shaped magnetic pattern rows were simultaneously reproduced, and the interval between the magnetic pattern rows during running was continuously measured from a shape of a reproduction waveform of each row.
  • the reciprocation running by the recording and reproducing apparatus was performed in a constant temperature and humidity chamber.
  • a speed of the reciprocation was 5 m/sec.
  • a temperature and humidity during the reciprocation running were gradually and repeatedly changed according to a predetermined environmental change program in a temperature range of 10° C. to 45° C. and the relative humidity range of 10% to 80%, independent of the reciprocation running described above.
  • the predetermined environmental change program may be, for example, that 10° C. and 10% ⁇ 29° C. and 80% ⁇ 10° C. and 10% are repeated twice.
  • the temperature and humidity are changed from 10° C. and 10% to 29° C. and 80% in two hours and from 29° C. and 80% to 10° C. and 10% in two hours.
  • the magnetic tape may not read a servo signal and slight (one or two) reloading is performed
  • the magnetic tape may not read a servo signal and medium (up to 10 times) reloading is performed
  • the magnetic tape may not read a servo signal and heavy (more than 10 times) reloading is performed
  • the magnetic tape may not read servo and occasionally stops due to a system error
  • the magnetic tape may not read servo and immediately stops due to a system error
  • the magnetic tape in a state of being loaded in the cartridge was kept for one week at 50° C. and 50% Rh environment, and the same determination was made again.
  • a reproduction signal of the magnetic tape was acquired using a loop tester (manufactured by Microphysics). The conditions for acquiring the reproduction signal are described below.
  • a peak of the adopted spectrum was taken as a signal amount S
  • floor noise without the peak was integrated to obtain a noise amount N
  • a ratio S/N of the signal amount S to the noise amount N was obtained as a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • the obtained SNR was converted into a relative value (dB) based on the SNR of Comparative Example 1 as a reference medium.
  • quality of an electromagnetic conversion characteristic was determined as follows.
  • the reel around which the tape was wound was taken out from the cartridge sample, and an end face of the wound tape was visually observed.
  • the reel has a flange, and at least one flange is transparent or translucent so that the internal tape winding can be observed over the flange.
  • the tape was determined to have winding deviation. Furthermore, the “winding deviation” is considered to be worse as a plurality of steps and protrusions are observed.
  • the above determination was made for each sample. The winding deviation state of each sample was compared with the winding deviation state of Comparative Example 1 as a reference medium, and the quality was determined as follows.
  • Table 1 shows the configurations and evaluation results of the magnetic tapes of Examples 1 to 25 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4.
  • ⁇ w Dimension change amount in the width direction of the magnetic tape with respect to a change in tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic tape (unit: ppm/N)
  • V Speed for measuring elastic limit (unit: mm/min)
  • t m Average thickness of magnetic layer (unit: nm)
  • t b Average thickness of back layer (unit: ⁇ m)
  • R ab Surface roughness of back layer (unit: nm)
  • the determination results of the change amount in tape width was 4 or more. (In other words, the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width” is small). Therefore, it can be seen that the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is suitable for use in a recording and reproducing apparatus for adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction.
  • the dimensional change amount ⁇ w of the magnetic recording tape is 660 ppm/N or more, more preferably 700 ppm/N or more, even more preferably 750 ppm/N, still more preferably 800 ppm/N or more, and thus, the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the recording and reproducing apparatus for adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction (in particular, adjustment of the tape width by adjusting tension).
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value was 20 nm and the determination result of the amount of change in the tape width was 7
  • the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value was 28 nm and the determination result of the change in the tape width was 1.
  • Example 7 In a comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Example 3, ⁇ 1M of the magnetic tape of Example 7 was 0.4 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 7, whereas ⁇ 1M of the magnetic tape of Comparative Example 2 was 0.55 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 1. From these facts, it can be seen that the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the above-mentioned recording and reproducing apparatus because ⁇ 1M is 0.5 or less, preferably 0.48 or less, more preferably 0.45 or less, or still more preferably 0.42 or less.
  • Example 7 In a comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Example 4, ⁇ 1M of the magnetic tape of Example 7 was 0.4 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 7, whereas ⁇ 1M of the magnetic tape of Comparative Example 2 was 0.04 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 1. From these facts, it can be seen that the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the above-mentioned recording and reproducing apparatus because ⁇ 1M is 0.04 or more, preferably 0.05 or more, and more preferably 0.30 or more.
  • Example 7 From the comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Examples 2 to 4, it can be seen that, by adjusting the standard deviation ⁇ PES of the PES value and ⁇ 1M , running stability in the recording and reproducing apparatus that adjusts tension of the magnetic recording medium in the longitudinal direction may be enhanced and suitability for use in the recording and reproducing apparatus may be improved. In addition, it can be seen that the electromagnetic conversion characteristic can be improved by adjusting ⁇ 1M .
  • the thermal expansion coefficient ⁇ is preferably 5.9 ppm/° C. ⁇ 8 ppm/° C. from the viewpoint of suppressing the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”. Furthermore, from the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 3 to 6 and the like, it can be seen that the humidity expansion coefficient ⁇ is preferably ⁇ 5 ppm/% RH from the viewpoint of suppressing the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”.
  • the elastic limit value ⁇ MD in the longitudinal direction is 0.8 N ⁇ MD from the viewpoint of suppressing the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”.
  • the thickness of the magnetic layer is preferably 100 nm or less, particularly 90 nm or less, from the viewpoint of improving electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • the surface roughness R ab of the back layer is preferably 3.0 nm R ab 7.5 nm from the viewpoint of improving electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • the friction coefficient ⁇ is 0.18 ⁇ 0.82, particularly 0.20 ⁇ 0.80, more particularly, 0.20 ⁇ 0.78, and still more particularly, 0.25 ⁇ 0.75, from the viewpoint of suppressing winding deviation.
  • the squareness ratio S2 of the magnetic tape in the vertical direction is preferably 73% or more, and particularly 80% or more, from the viewpoint of improving electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • Example 13 From the comparison of the results of Example 13 and other Examples, it can be seen that evaluation results similar to those of the coating type magnetic recording tape can be obtained even with the vacuum thin film type (sputter type) magnetic recording tape is used.
  • the configurations, methods, steps, shapes, materials, and numerical values or the like in the above embodiments and examples are merely examples, and a configuration, a method, a step, a shape, a material and a numerical value or the like different therefrom may also be used.
  • the chemical formulas of the compounds and the like are typical, and are not limited to the mentioned valences in case of the generic name of the same compound.
  • the configurations, methods, steps, shapes, materials, and numerical values or the like of the above-described embodiments and examples may be combined without departing from the spirit of the present technology.
  • the numerical value range indicated by “to” indicates the range including the numerical values mentioned before and after “to” as the minimum value and the maximum value, respectively.
  • the upper or lower limit of the numerical range of a certain stage may be replaced with the upper or lower limit of the numerical range of the other stage.
  • the materials exemplified in this specification can be used alone or in combination of two or more, unless otherwise specified.
  • a dimensional change amount ⁇ w in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N ⁇ w
  • a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer
  • a standard deviation ⁇ PES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal in which the servo pattern is reproduced is ⁇ PES ⁇ 25 nm
  • a maximum value ⁇ 1M of a friction coefficient ⁇ 1 between a surface on a side of the magnetic layer and an LTO3 head in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient ⁇ 1 is performed 250 times is 0.04 ⁇ 1M ⁇ 0.5.
  • the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a surface roughness R ab of the back layer is 3.0 nm ⁇ R ab ⁇ 7.5 nm.
  • the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a friction coefficient ⁇ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer is 0.20 ⁇ 0.80.
  • the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness t b of the back layer is t b ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a friction coefficient ⁇ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer is 0.20 ⁇ 0.80.
  • the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness t b of the back layer is t b ⁇ 0.6 ⁇ m.

Landscapes

  • Magnetic Record Carriers (AREA)
  • Moving Of The Head To Find And Align With The Track (AREA)
  • Manufacturing Of Magnetic Record Carriers (AREA)

Abstract

There is provided a magnetic recording medium which has a layer structure including a magnetic layer and a base layer, and of which an average thickness tT is tT≤5.6 μm, a dimensional change amount Δw in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw, a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer, a standard deviation σPES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal in which the servo pattern is reproduced is σPES≤25 nm, and a maximum value μ1M of a friction coefficient μ1 between a surface on a side of the magnetic layer and an LTO3 head in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 is performed 250 times is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of Japanese Priority Patent Application JP 2019-086724 filed on Apr. 26, 2019, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present technology relates to a magnetic recording medium.
  • BACKGROUND ART
  • In recent years, in magnetic tapes (magnetic recording mediums) used as data storage for computers, a track width and a distance between adjacent tracks have become very narrow in order to improve a recording density of data. Thus, when the track width and the distance between the tracks are narrow as described above, a maximum allowable change amount as a dimensional change amount of a tape itself due to environmental factors such as, for example, a change or the like in temperature and humidity becomes small.
  • Several technologies for reducing the dimensional change amount have been proposed so far. For example, in the magnetic tape medium disclosed in PTL 1 below, in a case where a Young's modulus of a nonmagnetic support in a width direction is X and a Young's modulus of a back layer in the width direction is Y, X×Y is 6×105 or more if X is 850 kg/mm2 or greater or less than 850 kg/mm2 and Y/Z is 6.0 or less when a Young's modulus of a layer in the width direction including a magnetic layer is Z.
  • CITATION LIST Patent Literature [PTL 1]
    • JP 2005-332510A
    SUMMARY Technical Problem
  • It is desirable to provide a magnetic recording medium capable of suppressing a dimensional change in a width direction by adjusting tension applied in a longitudinal direction of a tape.
  • Solution to Problem
  • According to an embodiment of the present technology, there is provided a magnetic recording medium
  • which has a layer structure including a magnetic layer and a base layer, and
  • of which an average thickness tT is tT≤5.6 μm,
  • a dimensional change amount Δw in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw,
  • a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer,
  • a standard deviation σPES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal in which the servo pattern is reproduced is σPES≤25 nm, and
  • a maximum value μ1M of a friction coefficient μ1 between a surface on a side of the magnetic layer and an LTO3 head in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 is performed 250 times is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in a vertical direction.
  • The dimensional change amount Δw may be 700 ppm/N≤Δw.
  • The dimensional change amount Δw may be 750 ppm/N≤Δw.
  • The dimensional change amount Δw may be 800 ppm/N≤Δw.
  • The layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a surface roughness Rab of the back layer may be 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm.
  • The layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a friction coefficient μ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer may be 0.20≤μ≤0.80.
  • A thermal expansion coefficient α of the magnetic recording medium may be 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient β of the magnetic recording medium may be β≤5.5 ppm/% RH.
  • A Poisson's ratio ρ of the magnetic recording medium may be 0.25≤ρ.
  • An elastic limit value σMD of the magnetic recording medium in the longitudinal direction may be 0.7 N≤σMD.
  • The elastic limit value σMD of the magnetic recording medium may not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
  • The magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, and the magnetic layer may be vertically aligned.
  • The layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness tb of the back layer may be tb≤0.6 μm.
  • According to another embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, and the magnetic layer may be a sputtered layer.
  • In a case where the magnetic layer is a sputtered layer, an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer may be 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
  • According to still another embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer, and the magnetic layer may contain magnetic powder.
  • In a case where the magnetic layer contains magnetic powder, the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer may be 35 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
  • The magnetic powder may contain ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, the magnetic recording medium may include a back layer, and the surface roughness Rab of the back layer may be 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, the magnetic recording medium may include a magnetic layer and a back layer, and a friction coefficient μ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer may be 0.20≤μ≤0.80.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, a thermal expansion coefficient α of 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient β of β≤5.5 ppm/% RH.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction and a Poisson's ratio ρ of 0.25≤ρ.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction and an elastic limit value σMD of 0.7 N≤σMD in the longitudinal direction.
  • The elastic limit value σMD of the magnetic recording medium may not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, and the magnetic layer may be vertically aligned.
  • The magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, the layer structure includes a back layer on the side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness tb of the back layer is Tb≤0.6 μm.
  • According to still another embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, and the magnetic layer may be a sputtered layer.
  • In a case where the magnetic layer is a sputtered layer, an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer may be 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
  • According to further embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic recording medium may have a squareness ratio of 65% or more in the vertical direction, and the magnetic layer may contain magnetic powder.
  • In a case where the magnetic layer contains magnetic powder, the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer may be 35 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
  • The magnetic powder may contain ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium according to a first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic particle.
  • FIG. 3A is a perspective view showing a configuration of a measurement device.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic view showing the details of a measurement device.
  • FIG. 4 is a graph showing an example of an SFD curve.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a configuration of a recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic particle in a modification.
  • FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium in a modification.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic view showing a configuration of a sputtering apparatus.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a magnetic recording medium according to a third embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of data bands and servo bands provided on a magnetic recording medium.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a servo pattern in a servo band.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method of measuring PES.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining correction of movement in a width direction of a tape.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a method of measuring a friction coefficient between a magnetic surface and an LTO3 head.
  • DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS
  • Hereinafter, preferred embodiments for implementing the present technology will be described. Note that the embodiments described below show representative embodiments of the present technology, and the scope of the present technology is not limited to only these embodiments.
  • The present technology will be described in the following order.
  • 1. Description of the present technology
  • 2. First embodiment (example of coating type magnetic recording medium)
  • (1) Configuration of magnetic recording medium
  • (2) Description of each layer
  • (3) Physical properties and structure
  • (4) Method of manufacturing magnetic recording medium
  • (5) Recording and reproducing apparatus
  • (6) Effect
  • (7) Modification
  • 3. Second embodiment (example of vacuum thin film type magnetic recording medium)
  • (1) Configuration of magnetic recording medium
  • (2) Description of each layer
  • (3) Physical properties and structure
  • (4) Configuration of sputtering apparatus
  • (5) Method of manufacturing magnetic recording medium
  • (6) Effect
  • (7) Modification
  • 4. Third embodiment (example of vacuum thin film type magnetic recording medium)
  • 5. Example
  • 1. Description of the Present Technology
  • There is a need to further increase a recording capacity per magnetic recording cartridge. For example, in order to increase the recording capacity, it is conceivable to increase a tape length per magnetic recording cartridge by reducing a thickness of a magnetic recording medium (e.g., a magnetic recording tape) included in the magnetic recording cartridge (reducing an overall thickness).
  • However, as the magnetic recording medium becomes thinner, a dimensional change may occur in a track width direction. The dimensional change is particularly likely to occur in a case where the magnetic recording medium is stored for a long time.
  • The dimensional change in the width direction may cause an undesirable phenomenon for magnetic recording, such as, for example, an off-track phenomenon, etc. The off-track phenomenon refers to a situation in which a target track is not present at a track position for a magnetic head to read or a situation in which the magnetic head reads a wrong track position.
  • In the past, in order to suppress the dimensional change of the magnetic recording medium, for example, a method of adding a layer for suppressing the dimensional change of the magnetic recording medium or the like is performed.
  • However, the addition of the layer may increase a thickness of the magnetic recording tape and does not increase a tape length per cartridge product.
  • The inventors of the present technology are examining a magnetic recording medium suitable for use in a recording and reproducing apparatus, whose width may be kept constant or substantially constant by adjusting tension of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium in a longitudinal direction. The recording and reproducing apparatus detects, for example, dimensions or a dimensional change in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium, and adjusts tension in the longitudinal direction on the basis of a detection result.
  • However, in the magnetic recording medium suppressed in the dimensional change, the dimensional change amount in the width direction based on the change in tension in the longitudinal direction is small. Therefore, it is difficult to keep the width of the magnetic recording medium constant or substantially constant even though tension is adjusted in the longitudinal direction by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • In consideration of the above circumstances, the present inventors examined a magnetic recording medium thin and suitable for use in a recording and reproducing apparatus which adjusts tension in a longitudinal direction. As a result, the present inventors have found that a magnetic recording medium having a specific configuration satisfies these requirements. In other words, the present technology provides a magnetic recording medium which has a layer structure including a magnetic layer and a base layer, and of which an average thickness tT is tT≤5.6 μm, a dimensional change amount Δw in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw, a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer, a standard deviation σPES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal whose servo pattern is reproduced is σPES≤25 nm, and a maximum value μ1M of a friction coefficient μ1 when measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 between a surface on a magnetic layer side and an LTO3 head (that is in conformity with LTO3 standard) is performed 250 times is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5.
  • In the magnetic recording medium according to the present embodiment of the present technology, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value is 25 nm or less and a maximum value μ1M of the friction coefficient μ1 is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5 as described above. Because the σPES and the maximum value μ1M are within these numerical ranges, running stability of the magnetic recording medium may be improved and, in particular, running stability of the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus that adjusts tension of the magnetic recording medium in a longitudinal direction can be improved. For example, in a case where σPES is too high, linearity of the servo band is low, and thus, it may be difficult to read a servo signal even if tension is adjusted by the magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus. Furthermore, even if the σPES is equal to or less than the upper limit value, in a case where the maximum value μ1M is too high, adjustment of the width by the tension adjustment does not work, and in a case where the above maximum value μ1M is too low, the magnetic recording medium may slip and this may affect running stability.
  • Moreover, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 23 nm or less, more preferably 21 nm or less, and more preferably 18 nm or less.
  • Furthermore, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 15 nm or more, and more preferably 17 nm or more.
  • Moreover, the maximum value μ1M of the friction coefficient μ1 between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the LTO3 head of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 0.05 or more, and more preferably 0.30 or more.
  • Moreover, the maximum value μ1M of the friction coefficient μ1 between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the LTO3 head of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably 0.48 or less, more preferably 0.45 or less, and still more preferably 0.43 or less.
  • The average thickness tT of the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is 5.6 μm or less, more preferably 5.3 μm or less, and still more preferably 5.2 μm or less, 5.0 μm or less, or 4.6 μm or less.
  • Because the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is so thin, for example, the length of the tape wound up in one magnetic recording cartridge can be longer, thereby increasing a recording capacity per magnetic recording cartridge.
  • In the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology, the dimensional change amount Δw in the width direction with respect to the change in tension in the longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N or more, more preferably 670 ppm/N or more, and still more preferably 700 ppm/N or more, 710 ppm/N or more, 730 ppm/N or more, 750 ppm/N or more, 780 ppm/N or more, or 800 ppm/N or more. The fact that the magnetic recording medium has the dimensional change amount Δw within the above numerical range contributes to making it possible to maintain the width of the magnetic recording medium at a constant level by adjusting tension of the magnetic recording medium in the longitudinal direction.
  • Furthermore, an upper limit of the dimensional change amount Δw is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 1700000 ppm/N or less, preferably 20000 ppm/N or less, more preferably 8000 ppm/N or less, still more preferably 5000 ppm/N or less, 4000 ppm/N or less, 3000 ppm/N or less, or 2000 ppm/N or less.
  • In a case where the dimensional change amount Δw is too large, it may be difficult to stably run in the manufacturing process.
  • A method of measuring the dimensional change amount Δw will be described in (3) of 2. below.
  • In the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology, the layer structure may include a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the magnetic layer side, and a surface roughness Rab of the back layer is preferably 2.5 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm, and more preferably 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.3 nm.
  • The surface roughness Rab within the above numerical range contributes to improvement of handling properties of the magnetic recording medium.
  • The surface roughness Rab of the back layer is more preferably 7.2 nm or less, and still more preferably 7.0 nm or less, 6.5 nm or less, 6.3 nm or less, or 6.0 nm or less. Furthermore, the surface roughness Rab may be more preferably 3.2 nm or more, and still more preferably 3.4 nm or more. Because the surface roughness Rab is within the above numerical value range, especially, the upper limit value or less, and thus, good electromagnetic conversion characteristic may be achieved in addition to improvement of the handling properties.
  • A method of measuring the surface roughness Rab will be described in (3) of 2. below.
  • According to the embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic recording medium may be an long-shaped magnetic recording medium and may be a magnetic recording tape (in particular, a long-shaped magnetic recording tape).
  • A magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may include a magnetic layer, a base layer, and a back layer, and may include any other layer in addition to those layers. The other layer may be appropriately selected according to types of magnetic recording medium. The magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may be, for example, a coating type magnetic recording medium or a vacuum thin film type magnetic recording medium. The coating type magnetic recording medium will be described in more detail in 2. below. The vacuum thin film type magnetic recording medium will be described in more detail in 3. and 4. below. For the layers included in the magnetic recording medium other than the above three layers, those descriptions may be referred to.
  • The magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may have, for example, at least one data band and at least two servo bands. The number of the data bands may be, for example, 2 to 10, particularly, 3 to 6, and more particularly, 4 or 5. The number of the servo bands may be, for example, 3 to 11, particularly, 4 to 7, and more particularly, 5 or 6. These servo bands and data bands may be arranged, for example, to extend in the longitudinal direction of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium (in particular, a magnetic recording tape), and in particular, to be substantially parallel. The data bands and the servo bands may be provided in the magnetic layer. The magnetic recording media having the data bands and the servo bands may include a magnetic recording tape conforming to the linear tape-open (LTO) standard. In other words, the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may be a magnetic recording tape conforming to the LTO standard. For example, the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology may be a magnetic recording tape conforming to LTO8 or a later standard (e.g., LTO9, LTO10, LTO11, LTO12, etc.).
  • A width of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium (particularly, magnetic recording tape) according to the embodiment of the present technology may be, for example, 5 mm to 30 mm, particularly, 7 mm to 25 mm, more particularly, 10 mm to 20 mm, and even more particularly, 11 mm to 19 mm. The length of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium (in particular, the magnetic recording tape) may be, for example, 500 m to 1,500 m.
  • For example, a tape width according to the LTO8 standard is 12.65 mm and a length is 960 m.
  • 2. First Embodiment (Example of Coating Type Magnetic Recording Medium) (1) Configuration of Magnetic Recording Medium
  • Next, a configuration of the magnetic recording medium 10 according to a first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1. The magnetic recording medium 10 is, for example, a magnetic recording medium subjected to vertical alignment processing, and includes a long-shaped base layer (also referred to as substrate) 11, a ground layer (non-magnetic layer) 12 provided on one principal plane of the base layer 11, a magnetic layer (also referred to as a record layer) 13 provided on the ground layer 12, and a back layer 14 provided on the other principal plane of the base layer 11 as shown in FIG. 1.
  • Hereinafter, among the both principal planes of the magnetic recording medium 10, the plane on which the magnetic layer 13 is provided will be referred to as a magnetic surface, and the plane opposite to the magnetic surface (the plane on which the back layer 14 is provided) will be referred to as a back surface.
  • The magnetic recording medium 10 has an elongated shape and runs in the longitudinal direction during recording and reproducing.
  • Furthermore, the magnetic recording medium 10 may be configured to be able to record a signal at a shortest recording wavelength of preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 75 nm or less, still more preferably 60 nm or less, particularly preferably 50 nm or less, and may be used for, for example, a recording and reproducing apparatus whose shortest recording wavelength is in the above range. The recording and reproducing apparatus may include a ring type head as a recording head. A recording track width is, for example, 2 μm or less.
  • (2) Description of Each Layer (Base Layer)
  • The base layer 11 may function as a support of the magnetic recording medium 10, and may be, for example, an elongated flexible non-magnetic substrate, and in particular, may be a non-magnetic film. A thickness of the base layer 11 may be, for example, 2 μm to 8 μm, preferably 2.2 μm to 7 μm, more preferably 2.5 μm to 6 μm, and still more preferably 2.6 μm to 5 μm. The base layer 11 may contain, for example, at least one of a polyester-based resin, a polyolefin-based resin, a cellulose derivative, a vinyl-based resin, an aromatic polyether ketone resin, or any other polymer resin. In a case where the base layer 11 contains two or more of the above-described materials, the two or more materials may be mixed, copolymerized, or stacked.
  • Examples of the polyester-based resin may include one or a mixture of two or more of polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), polybutylene naphthalate (PBN), polycyclohexylene dimethylene terephthalate (PCT), polyethylene-p-oxybenzoate (PEB), and polyethylenebisphenoxycarboxylate. According to a preferred embodiment of the present technology, the base layer 11 may include PET or PEN.
  • The polyolefin-based resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyethylene (PE) and polypropylene (PP).
  • The cellulose derivative may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose acetate butyrate (CAB), and cellulose acetate propionate (CAP).
  • The vinyl-based resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyvinylidene chloride (PVDC).
  • The aromatic polyether ketone resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyether ketone (PEK), polyether ether ketone (PEEK), polyether ketone ketone (PEKK), and polyether ether ketone ketone (PEEKK).
  • According to a preferred embodiment of the present technology, the base layer 11 may include PEEK.
  • Examples of any other polymer resin may be, for example, one or a mixture of two or more of polyamide (PA, nylon), aromatic PA (aromatic polyamide, aramid), polyimide (PI), aromatic PI, polyamide imide (PAI), aromatic PAI, polybenzoxazole (PBO) (e.g., Zylon (registered trademark)), polyether, polyether ester, polyether sulfone (PES), polyether imide (PEI), polysulfone (PSF), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS), polycarbonate (PC), polyarylate (PAR), and polyurethane (PU).
  • (Magnetic Layer)
  • The magnetic layer 13 may be, for example, a perpendicular record layer. The magnetic layer 13 may contain magnetic powder. The magnetic layer 13 may further contain, for example, a binder and conductive particles in addition to the magnetic powder. The magnetic layer 13 may further contain, for example, additives such as a lubricant, an abrasive, a corrosion inhibitor, and the like, as necessary.
  • An average thickness tm of the magnetic layer 13 is preferably 35 nm≤tm≤120 nm, more preferably 35 nm≤tm≤100 nm, and particularly preferably 35 nm≤tm≤90 nm. When the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer 13 is within the above numerical range, the magnetic layer 13 contributes to improvement of electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • The average thickness tm of the magnetic layer 13 may be obtained as follows. First, a specimen is fabricated by processing the magnetic recording medium 10 perpendicularly to a main surface thereof, and a cross-section of the specimen is observed by a transmission electron microscope (TEM) under the following conditions.
  • Device: TEM (H9000NAR manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.)
  • Acceleration voltage: 300 kV
  • Magnification: 100,000 times
  • Next, using an obtained TEM image, a thickness of the magnetic layer 13 is measured at positions of at least 10 spots in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10, and thereafter, the measured values are simply averaged (arithmetic mean) to be determined as an average thickness tm (nm) of the magnetic layer 13.
  • The magnetic layer 13 is preferably a vertically aligned magnetic layer. In the present specification, vertical alignment refers to that a squareness ratio S1 measured in the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is 35% or less. A method of measuring the squareness ratio S1 will be described separately below.
  • Note that the magnetic layer 13 may be a magnetic layer which is in-plane aligned (longitudinal alignment). In other words, the magnetic recording medium 10 may be a horizontal recording type magnetic recording medium. However, vertical alignment is more preferable in terms of higher recording density.
  • (Magnetic Powder)
  • Examples of magnetic particles forming magnetic powder contained in the magnetic layer 13 may contain epsilon type iron oxide (ε iron oxide), gamma hematite, magnetite, chromium dioxide, cobalt-coated iron oxide, hexagonal ferrite, barium ferrite (BaFe), Co ferrite, strontium ferrite, a metal, or the like, but are not limited thereto. The magnetic powder may be one or a combination or two or more thereof. In particular, preferably, the magnetic powder may contain ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder. Note that ε iron oxide may contain Ga and/or Al. These magnetic particles may be appropriately selected by those skilled in the art on the basis of factors such as, for example, the method of manufacturing the magnetic layer 13, specifications of the tape, a function of the tape, and the like.
  • An average particle size (average maximum particle size) D of the magnetic powder may be preferably 22 nm or less, more preferably 8 nm to 22 nm, and still more preferably 10 nm to 20 nm.
  • The average particle size D of the above magnetic powder is obtained as follows. First, the magnetic recording medium 10 to be measured is processed by a focused ion beam (FIB) method or the like to produce a thin piece, and a cross-section of the thin piece is observed by a transmission electron microscope (TEM). Next, 500 ε iron oxide particles are randomly selected from the captured TEM image, a maximum particle size dmax of each particle is measured, and a particle size distribution of the maximum particle size dmax of the magnetic powder is obtained. Here, the “maximum particle size dmax” refers to the so-called maximum Feret diameter. Specifically, the “maximum particle size dmax” refers to a maximum distance among distances between two parallel lines drawn from all angles so as to be in contact with outline of the ε iron oxide particle. Thereafter, a median diameter (50% diameter, D50) of the maximum particle size dmax is obtained from the particle size distribution of the obtained maximum particle size dmax, and is determined as an average particle size (average maximum particle size) D of the magnetic powder.
  • A shape of the magnetic particles depends on a crystal structure of the magnetic particles. For example, BaFe and strontium ferrites may have a hexagonal plate shape. The ε iron oxide may be spherical. The cobalt ferrite may be cubic. The metal may have a spindle shape. These magnetic particles are aligned in a manufacturing process of the magnetic recording medium 10.
  • According to a preferred embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic powder may contain powder of nanoparticles preferably containing ε iron oxide (hereinafter, referred to as “ε iron oxide particles”). Even with the fine particles of ε iron oxide particles, high coercive force can be obtained.
  • Preferably, the ε iron oxide contained in the ε iron oxide particle is preferentially crystal-aligned in a thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10.
  • The ε iron oxide particles have a spherical or substantially spherical shape or have a cubic or substantially cubic shape. Since the ε iron oxide particles have the shape as mentioned above, in a case where ε iron oxide particles are used as the magnetic particles, a contact area between particles in a thickness direction of the medium is reduced to thus suppress aggregation of the particles, as compared with a case where barium ferrite particles having a hexagonal plate-like shape are used as magnetic particles. Therefore, dispersibility of the magnetic powder may be increased to thus obtain a better signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
  • The ε iron oxide particles have a core-shell type structure. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the ε iron oxide particle includes a core portion 21 and a shell portion 22 provided around the core portion 21 and having a two-layer structure. The shell portion 22 having the two-layer structure includes a first shell portion 22 a provided on the core portion 21 and a second shell portion 22 b provided on the first shell portion 22 a.
  • The core portion 21 contains ε iron oxide. The ε iron oxide contained in the core portion 21 preferably has an ε-Fe2O3 crystal as a main phase, and more preferably includes a single phase ε-Fe2O3.
  • The first shell portion 22 a covers at least a portion of the periphery of the core portion 21. Specifically, the first shell portion 22 a may partially cover the periphery of the core portion 21 or may cover the entire periphery of the core portion 21. If exchange coupling of the core portion 21 and the first shell portion 22 a is sufficient and in terms of improvement of magnetic characteristic, the first shell portion 22 a preferably covers the entire surface of the core portion 21.
  • The first shell portion 22 a is a so-called soft magnetic layer, and may contain, for example, a soft magnetic material such as α-Fe, a Ni—Fe alloy, an Fe—Si—Al alloy, or the like. α-Fe may be obtained by reducing the ε iron oxide contained in the core portion 21.
  • The second shell portion 22 b is an oxide film as an anti-oxidation layer. The second shell portion 22 b may contain a iron oxide, aluminum oxide, or silicon oxide. The α iron oxide may contain, for example, at least one of Fe3O4, Fe2O3, or FeO. In a case where the first shell portion 22 a contains α-Fe (soft magnetic material), the α-iron oxide may be obtained by oxidizing α-Fe contained in the first shell portion 22 a.
  • Since the ε iron oxide particles have the first shell portion 22 a as described above, thermal stability may be ensured, whereby the coercive force Hc of the single core portion 21 may be maintained at a large value and/or the overall coercive force Hc of the ε iron oxide particles (core shell particles) may be adjusted to the coercive force Hc appropriate for recording.
  • Furthermore, since the ε iron oxide particles have the second shell portion 22 b as described above, the ε iron oxide particles are prevented from being exposed in the air during or before the manufacturing process of the magnetic recording medium 10 to cause the particle surfaces to be rusted, or the like, and thus, a degradation of the characteristic of the ε iron oxide particles can be suppressed. Therefore, a degradation of the characteristics of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be suppressed.
  • The ε iron oxide particle may have a shell portion 23 having a single layer structure as shown in FIG. 6. In this case, the shell portion 23 has a configuration similar to that of the first shell portion 22 a. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the degradation of the characteristics of the ε iron oxide particle, the ε iron oxide particle preferably has the shell portion 22 having a two-layer structure.
  • The ε iron oxide particle may contain an additive instead of the core-shell structure, or may have the core-shell structure and may contain the additive as well. In these cases, a part of Fe of the ε iron oxide particle is replaced by the additive. Since the coercive force Hc of the entire ε iron oxide particle may be adjusted to the coercive force Hc suitable for recording also by the ε iron oxide particle containing the additive, ease of recording may be improved. The additive is one or more selected from the group including metal element other than iron, preferably trivalent metal element, more preferably aluminum (Al), gallium (Ga), and indium (In).
  • Specifically, the ε iron oxide containing the additive is an ε-Fe2-xMxO3 crystal (here, M is one or more selected from the group including metal elements other than iron, preferably trivalent metal elements, more preferably Al, Ga, and In) and x is, for example, 0<x<1).
  • According to another preferred embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic powder may be barium ferrite (BaFe) magnetic powder. The barium ferrite magnetic powder contains magnetic particles of iron oxide containing barium ferrite as a main phase (hereinafter referred to as “barium ferrite particles”). The barium ferrite magnetic powder has high reliability of data recording, for example, in that the coercive force is not lowered even in a high temperature and high humidity environment, and the like. From this viewpoint, barium ferrite magnetic powder is preferable as the magnetic powder.
  • An average particle size of the barium ferrite magnetic powder is 50 nm or less, more preferably 10 nm to 40 nm, and still more preferably 12 nm to 25 nm.
  • In a case where the magnetic layer 13 contains the barium ferrite magnetic powder as magnetic powder, an average thickness tm [nm] of the magnetic layer 13 is preferably 35 nm≤tm≤100 nm. Furthermore, the coercive force Hc of the magnetic recording medium 10 measured in a thickness direction (vertical direction) is preferably 160 kA/m to 280 kA/m, more preferably 165 kA/m to 275 kA/m, and still more preferably 170 kA/m to 270 kA/m.
  • According to yet another preferred embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic powder may be cobalt ferrite magnetic powder. The cobalt ferrite magnetic powder contains magnetic particles of iron oxide containing cobalt ferrite as a main phase (hereinafter referred to as “cobalt ferrite magnetic particles”). The cobalt ferrite magnetic particles preferably have uniaxial anisotropy. The cobalt ferrite magnetic particles
  • have, for example, a cubic shape or a substantially cubic shape.
  • The cobalt ferrite is cobalt ferrite containing Co. The cobalt ferrite may further contain one or more selected from the group including Ni, Mn, Al, Cu, and Zn in addition to Co.
  • The cobalt ferrite has, for example, an average composition represented by the following Formula (1).

  • CoxMyFe2Oz  (1)
  • (where, in Formula (1), M is, for example, one or more metals selected from the group including Ni, Mn, Al, Cu, and Zn; x is a value within a range of 0.4≤x≤1.0; y is a value within the range of 0≤y≤0.3; however, x and y satisfy the relationship of (x+y)≤1.0; z is a value within a range of 3≤z≤4; a part of Fe may be substituted by another metal element).
  • An average particle size of the cobalt ferrite magnetic powder is preferably 25 nm or less, more preferably 23 nm or less. The coercive force Hc of the cobalt ferrite magnetic powder is preferably 2500 Oe or more, and more preferably 2600 Oe or more and 3500 Oe or less.
  • According to yet another preferred embodiment of the present technology, the magnetic powder may contain powder of nanoparticles containing hexagonal ferrite (hereinafter, referred to as “hexagonal ferrite particles”). The hexagonal ferrite particle has, for example, a hexagonal plate shape or a substantially hexagonal plate shape. The hexagonal ferrite may preferably contain at least one of Ba, Sr, Pb, or Ca, and more preferably at least one of Ba or Sr. The hexagonal ferrite may be, for example, barium ferrite or strontium ferrite. The barium ferrite may further contain at least one of Sr, Pb, or Ca in addition to Ba. The strontium ferrite may further contain at least one of Ba, Pb, or Ca in addition to Sr.
  • More specifically, the hexagonal ferrite may have an average composition represented by a general formula MFe12O19. Here, M is, for example, at least one metal of Ba, Sr, Pb, and Ca, preferably at least one metal of Ba and Sr. M may be a combination of Ba and at least one metal selected from the group including Sr, Pb, and Ca. Furthermore, M may be a combination of Sr and one or more metals selected from the group including Ba, Pb, and Ca. In the above general formula, part of Fe may be substituted by another metal element.
  • In a case where the magnetic powder contains powder of hexagonal ferrite particles, an average particle size of the magnetic powder is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 10 nm to 40 nm, and still more preferably 15 nm to 30 nm.
  • (Binder)
  • The binder is preferably a resin having a structure in which a crosslinking reaction is given to a polyurethane-based resin, a vinyl chloride-based resin, or the like. However, the binder is not limited thereto, and any other resins may be appropriately mixed depending on physical properties and the like desired for the magnetic recording medium 10. The resin to be mixed is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin generally used in the coating type magnetic recording medium 10.
  • The binder may include, for example, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl acetate, a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, a vinyl chloride-vinylidene chloride copolymer, a vinyl chloride-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-vinyl chloride-vinylidene chloride copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylic acid ester-vinylidene chloride copolymer, a methacrylic acid ester-vinylidene chloride copolymer a methacrylic acid ester-vinyl chloride copolymer, a methacrylic acid ester-ethylene copolymer, a polyvinyl fluoride, vinylidene chloride-acrylonitrile copolymer, an acrylonitrile-butadiene copolymer, a polyamide resin, polyvinyl butyral, a cellulose derivative (cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose propionate, and nitrocellulose), a styrene-butadiene copolymer, a polyester resin, an amino resin, synthetic rubber, and the like.
  • Furthermore, as the binder, a thermosetting resin or a reactive resin may be used, and examples thereof include a phenol resin, an epoxy resin, a urea resin, a melamine resin, an alkyd resin, a silicone resin, a polyamine resin, an urea-formaldehyde resin, and the like.
  • Furthermore, polar functional groups such as, —SO3M, —OSO3M, —COOM, P═O(OM)2, or the like, may be introduced into each binder described above in order to improve dispersibility of the magnetic powder. Here, in the formula, M is a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal such as lithium, potassium, sodium, and the like.
  • Moreover, examples of the polar functional group may include a side chain type having an end group of —NR1R2 and —NR1R2R3+X or a main chain type of >NR1R2+X. Here, in the formulas, R1, R2 and R3 are a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, and X is a halogen element ion such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, or the like, or an inorganic or organic ion. Furthermore, the polar functional group may also include —OH, —SH, —CN, and an epoxy group.
  • (Additive)
  • The magnetic layer 13 may further contain aluminum oxide (α, β or γ alumina), chromium oxide, silicon oxide, diamond, garnet, emery, boron nitride, titanium carbide, silicon carbide, titanium carbide, titanium oxide (rutile type titanium carbide or anatase type titanium oxide), or the like, as nonmagnetic reinforcing particles.
  • (Ground Layer)
  • The ground layer 12 is a nonmagnetic layer containing nonmagnetic powder and a binder as main components. The above description regarding the binder contained in the magnetic layer 13 is also applied to the binder contained in the ground layer 12. The ground layer 12 may further contain at least one of additives among conductive particles, a lubricant, a curing agent, a rust-preventive agent, and the like, as necessary.
  • An average thickness of the ground layer 12 is preferably 0.6 μm to 2.0 μm, and more preferably 0.8 μm to 1.4 μm. Note that the average thickness of the ground layer 12 is obtained in a manner similar to that of the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer 13. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the ground layer 12.
  • (Nonmagnetic Powder)
  • The nonmagnetic powder contained in the ground layer 12 may include, for example, at least one selected from inorganic particles and organic particles. One kind of nonmagnetic powder may be used alone, or two or more kinds of nonmagnetic powder may be used in combination. The inorganic particles include, for example, one or a combination of two or more selected from metal, metal oxide, metal carbonate, metal sulfate, metal nitride, metal carbide, and metal sulfide. More specifically, the inorganic particles may be, for example, one or two or more selected from iron oxyhydroxide, hematite, titanium oxide, and carbon black. A shape of the nonmagnetic powder may include, for example, various shapes such as a needle shape, sphere shape, cubic shape, plate shape, or the like, but is not particularly limited thereto.
  • (Back Layer)
  • The back layer 14 may contain a binder and nonmagnetic powder. The back layer 14 may contain various additives such as a lubricant, a curing agent, an antistatic agent, and the like, as necessary. The above description of the binder and the nonmagnetic powder contained in the ground layer 12 is also applied to the binder and the nonmagnetic powder contained in the back layer 14.
  • An average particle size of the inorganic particles contained in the back layer 14 is preferably 10 nm to 150 nm, and more preferably 15 nm to 110 nm. The average particle size of the inorganic particles is obtained in a manner similar to that of the average particle size D of the magnetic powder described above.
  • An average thickness tb of the back layer 14 is preferably tb≤0.6 μm. Since the average thickness tb of the back layer 14 is within the above range, even in a case where the average thickness tT of the magnetic recording medium 10 is tT≤5.5 μm, the thicknesses of the ground layer 12 and the base layer 11 may be kept thick, whereby running stability of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the recording and reproducing apparatus may be maintained.
  • The average thickness tb of the back layer 14 is obtained as follows. First, a ½ inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared and cut into a length of 250 mm to prepare a sample. Next, thicknesses of different spots of the sample are measured at 5 or more points using a laser hologage manufactured by Mitsutoyo Co., Ltd., as a measurement device, and the measured values are simply averaged (arithmetic average) to obtain an average value tT[μm]. Subsequently, the back layer 14 of the sample is removed with a solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) or diluted hydrochloric acid, and thereafter, thicknesses of different spots of the sample are measured at 5 or more points using the laser hologage and the measured values are simply averaged (arithmetic average) to obtain an average value tB[μm]. Thereafter, the average thickness tb[μm] of the back layer 14 is obtained by the following equation.

  • t b[μm]=t T[μm]−t B [μm]
  • (3) Physical Properties and Structure (Average Thickness tT of Magnetic Recording Medium)
  • The average thickness tT of the magnetic recording medium 10 is tT≤5.6 μm. When the average thickness tT of the magnetic recording medium 10 is tT≤5.6 μm, a recording capacity that can be recorded in one data cartridge can be increased as compared to the related art. A lower limit value of the average thickness tT of the magnetic recording medium 10 is, for example, 3.5 μm≤tT, but is not particularly limited.
  • The average thickness tT of the magnetic recording medium 10 is obtained by the method of measuring the average value tT described above in the method of measuring the average thickness tb of the back layer 14.
  • (Dimensional Change Amount Δw)
  • The dimensional change amount Δw [ppm/N] of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the width direction with respect to a change in tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw, more preferably 670 ppm/N≤Δw, more preferably 700 ppm/N≤Δw, more preferably 710 ppm/N≤Δw, more preferably 730 ppm/N≤Δw, more preferably 750 ppm/N≤Δw, still more preferably 780 ppm/N≤Δw, and particularly preferably 800 ppm/N≤Δw. If the dimensional change amount Δw is Δw<640 ppm/N, it may be difficult to suppress a change in width in the adjustment of longitudinal tension by the recording and reproducing apparatus. The upper limit value of the dimensional change amount Δw is not particularly limited. For example, Δw≤1700000 ppm/N, preferably Δw≤20000 ppm/N, more preferably Δw≤8000 ppm/N, still more preferably Δw≤5000 ppm/N, Δw≤4000 ppm/N, Δw≤3000 ppm/N, or Δw≤2000 ppm/N.
  • Those skilled in the art can appropriately set the dimensional change amount Δw. For example, the dimensional change amount Δw may be set to a desired value by selecting a thickness of the base layer 11 and/or a material of the base layer 11.
  • Furthermore, the dimensional change amount Δw may be set to a desired value, for example, by adjusting the stretching strength in the vertical and horizontal directions of the film constituting the base layer. For example, Δw decreases more when the film is stretched more strongly in the width direction, and conversely, Δw increases when the film is stretched strongly in the longitudinal direction.
  • The dimensional change amount Δw is obtained as follows. First, a ½ inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared and cut into a length of 250 mm to prepare a sample 10S. Next, loads are applied in order of 0.2 N, 0.6 N, and 1.0 N in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10S, and widths of the sample 10S at the loads of 0.2 N, 0.6 N, and 1.0 N are measured. Subsequently, the dimensional change amount Δw is determined from the following equation. Note that the measurement in a case of applying the load of 0.6 N is carried out to check whether an abnormality has not occurred in the measurement (in particular, in order to check whether these three measurement results are linear), and the measurement results are not used in the following equation.
  • Δ w [ ppm / N ] = D ( 0.2 N ) [ mm ] - D ( 1.0 N ) [ mm ] D ( 0.2 N ) [ mm ] × 1 , 000 , 000 ( 1.0 [ N ] ) - ( 0.2 [ N ] ) [ Equation 1 ]
  • (where, D(0.2 N) and D(1.0 N) represent widths of the sample 10S when 0.2 N and 1.0 N are loaded in the longitudinal direction of sample 10S, respectively).
  • The widths of the sample 10S when each load is applied are measured as follows. First, a measurement device shown in FIG. 3A including a digital dimension measuring instrument LS-7000 manufactured by Keyence Corporation is prepared as a measurement device, and the sample 10S is set in the measurement device.
  • Specifically, one end of the long-shaped sample (magnetic recording medium) 10S is fixed by a fixing portion 231. Next, as shown in FIG. 3A, the sample 10S is placed on five substantially cylindrical and rod-like support members 232. The sample 10S is placed on the five support members 232 so that a back surface thereof is in contact with the five support members 232. The five support members 232 (particularly, surfaces thereof) all include stainless steel SUS304, and surface roughness Rz (maximum height) thereof is 0.15 μm to 0.3 μm.
  • The arrangement of the five rod-like support members 232 will be described with reference to FIG. 3B. As shown in FIG. 3B, the sample 10S is placed on the five support members 232.
  • Hereinafter, the five support members 232 will be referred to as, starting from the side closest to the fixing portion 231, a “first support member”, a “second support member”, a “third support member” (having a slit 232A), a “fourth support member”, and a “fifth support member” (closest to a weight 233). A diameter of these five support members is 7 mm. A distance d1 between the first support member and the second support member (in particular, a distance between the centers of these support members) is 20 mm. A distance d2 between the second support member and the third support member is 30 mm. A distance d3 between the third support member and the fourth support member is 30 mm. A distance d4 between the fourth support member and the fifth support member is 20 mm. Furthermore, the second support member, the third support member, and the fourth support member are arranged so that portions of the sample 10S placed between the second support member, the third support member, and the fourth support member forms a substantially perpendicular plane with respect to the direction of gravity. Furthermore, the first support member and the second support member are arranged so that the sample 10S forms an angle of θ1=30° with respect to the substantially perpendicular plane between the first support member and the second support member. Moreover, the fourth support member and the fifth support member are arranged so that the sample 10S forms an angle of θ2=30° with respect to the substantially perpendicular plane between the fourth support member and the fifth support member.
  • Furthermore, among the five support members 232, the third support member is fixed so as not to rotate, while the other four support members are all rotatable.
  • The sample 10S is held on the support member 232 so as not to move in a width direction of the sample 10S. Note that, among the support members 232, the support member 232 positioned between a light emitter 234 and a light receiver 235 and positioned substantially at the center between the fixing portion 231 and a load applying portion has the slit 232A. Light L is irradiated from the light emitter 234 to the light receiver 235 through the slit 232A. A slit width of the slit 232A is 1 mm and the light L may pass through the width, without being blocked by the rim of the slit 232A.
  • Subsequently, after the measurement device is accommodated in a chamber controlled in a predetermined environment controlled at a constant temperature of 25° C. and a relative humidity of 50%, the weight 233 for applying a load of 0.2 N is attached to the other end of the sample 10S and the sample 10S is left for 2 hours in the environment. After 2 hours, a width of the sample 10S is measured. Next, the weight for applying the load of 0.2 N is changed to a weight for applying a load of 0.6 N, and the width of the sample 10S is measured 5 minutes after the switch. Finally, the weight is changed to a weight for applying a load of 1.0 N, and the width of the sample 10S is measured 5 minutes after the switch.
  • As described above, by adjusting the weight of the weight 233, the load applied in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10S may be changed. With each load applied, light L is irradiated from the light emitter 234 toward the light receiver 235, and the width of the sample 10S to which the load is applied in the longitudinal direction is measured. The measurement of the width is performed in a state where the sample 10S is not curled. The light emitter 234 and the light receiver 235 are provided in the digital dimension measuring instrument LS-7000.
  • (Thermal Expansion Coefficient α)
  • The thermal expansion coefficient α [ppm/° C.] of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and more preferably 5.9 ppm/° C.≤α≤8 ppm/° C. When the thermal expansion coefficient α is within the above range, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • The thermal expansion coefficient α is obtained as follows.
  • First, the sample 10S is prepared in a manner similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount Δw, the sample 10S is set in a measurement device similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount Δw, and thereafter, the measurement device is accommodated in a chamber of a predetermined environment controlled at a temperature of 29° C. and relative humidity of 24%. Next, a load of 0.2 N is applied in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10S, and the sample 10S was placed in the above environment for 2 hours. Thereafter, with the relative humidity of 24% maintained, widths of the sample 10S at 45° C., 29° C., and 10° C. are measured, while changing the temperatures in order of 45° C., 29° C., and 10° C., and the thermal expansion coefficient α is obtained from the following equation. Here, the widths of the sample 10S are measured at these temperatures 2 hours after each temperature is reached. Note that the measurement at the temperature of 29° C. is carried out in order to check whether an abnormality has not occurred in the measurement (in particular, to check whether these three measurement results are linear) and the measurement results are not used in the following equation.
  • α [ ppm / ° C . ] = D ( 45 ° C . ) [ mm ] - D ( 10 ° C . ) [ mm ] D ( 10 ° C . ) [ mm ] × 1 , 000 , 000 ( 45 [ ° C . ] ) - ( 10 [ ° C . ] ) [ Equation 2 ]
  • (where, D(45° C.) and D(10° C.) represent the widths of the sample 10S at the temperatures of 45° C. and 10° C., respectively).
  • (Humidity Expansion Coefficient β)
  • A humidity expansion coefficient β [ppm/% RH] of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably β≤5.5 ppm/% RH, more preferably β≤5.2 ppm/% RH, and still more preferably β≤5.0 ppm/% RH. When the humidity expansion coefficient β is within the range, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • The humidity expansion coefficient β is obtained as follows.
  • First, the sample 10S is prepared in a manner similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount Δw and set in a measurement device similar to that of the method of measuring the dimensional change amount Δw, and thereafter, the measurement device is accommodated in a chamber of a predetermined environment controlled at a temperature of 29° C. and a relative humidity of 24%. Next, a load of 0.2 N is applied in the longitudinal direction of the sample 10S, and the sample is left in the environment for 2 hours. Thereafter, with the temperature of 29° C. maintained, widths of the sample 10S at relative humidity of 80%, 24%, and 10% are measured, while the relative humidity is changed in order of 80%, 24%, and 10%, and a humidity expansion coefficient β is obtained by the following equation. Here, the widths of the sample 10S are measured at these humidity immediately after each humidity is reached. Note that the measurement at the humidity of 24% is carried out in order to check whether an abnormality has not occurred in the measurement, and the measurement results are not used in the following equation.
  • β [ ppm / % RH ] = D ( 80 % ) [ mm ] - D ( 10 % ) [ mm ] D ( 10 % ) [ mm ] × 1 , 000 , 000 ( 80 [ % ] ) - ( 10 [ % ] ) [ Equation 3 ]
  • (where, D(80%) and D(10%) represent the widths of the sample 10S at the relative humidity 80% and 10%, respectively).
  • (Poisson's Ratio ρ)
  • A Poisson's ratio ρ of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably 0.25≤ρ, more preferably 0.29≤ρ, and still more preferably 0.3≤ρ. When the Poisson's ratio ρ is within the above range, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus.
  • The Poisson's ratio ρ is obtained as follows. First, a ½ inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared and cut into a length of 150 mm to prepare a sample, and a mark having a size of 6 mm×6 mm is given to the center of the sample. Next, both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the sample are chucked so that a distance between chucks is 100 mm, an initial load of 2 N is applied, a length of the mark in the longitudinal direction of the sample at that time is determined as an initial length and a width of the mark in a width direction of the sample is determined as an initial width. Subsequently, the sample is stretched with an Instron type universal tensile tester at a tensile speed of 0.5 mm/min and dimensional change amounts of the mark in the length of the mark in the longitudinal direction of the sample and the width of the mark in the width direction of the sample are measured with an image sensor manufactured by Keyence Corporation. Thereafter, Poisson's ratio ρ is obtained from the following equation.
  • ρ = { ( Dimensional Change Amount of Width of Mark [ mm ] ) ( Initial Width [ mm ] ) } { ( Dimensional Change Amount of Length of Mark [ mm ] ) ( Initial Length [ mm ] ) } [ Equation 4 ]
  • (Longitudinal Elasticity Limit Value σMD)
  • The elasticity limit value σMD [N] in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be preferably 0.7 N σMD, more preferably 0.75 N≤σMD, and still more preferably 0.8 N σMD. When the elasticity limit value σMD is within the above range, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be further suppressed by adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 by the recording and reproducing apparatus. Furthermore, it is easier to control a drive side. An upper limit value of the elasticity limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not particularly limited and may be, for example, σMD≤5.0 N. Preferably, the elasticity limit value σMD does not depend on a speed V when an elastic limit is measured. The reason is because, when the elastic limit value σMD does not depend on the speed V, the change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be effectively suppressed without being affected by a running speed of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the recording and reproducing apparatus and a tension adjustment speed or responsiveness of the recording and reproducing apparatus. The elasticity limit value σMD is set to a desired value, for example, depending on a selection of curing conditions of the ground layer 12, the magnetic layer 13, and the back layer 14, and or a selection of a material of the base layer 11. For example, as a time for curing paint for forming the ground layer, paint for forming the magnetic layer, and paint for forming the back layer is increased or as a curing temperature thereof is increased, a reaction between a binder and a curing agent contained in each paint is accelerated. As a result, elastic characteristic are improved to improve the elasticity limit value σMD.
  • The elastic limit value σMD is obtained as follows. First, a ½ inch-wide magnetic recording medium 10 is prepared, cut into a length of 150 mm to prepare a sample, and both ends of the sample in the longitudinal direction are chuck in the universal tensile tester so that a distance λ0 between the chucks is 100 mm (λ0=100 mm). Next, the sample is stretched at a tensile speed of 0.5 mm/min, and a load σ(N) regarding the distance λ(mm) between the chucks is continuously measured. Subsequently, a relationship between Δλ (%) and σ(N) is graphed using the obtained data of λ(mm) and σ(N). However, Δλ(%) is given by the following equation.

  • Δλ(%)=((λ−λ0)/λ0)×100
  • Next, in the above graph, a region in which the graph is a straight line is calculated in the region of σ≥0.2 N and a maximum load σ thereof is set as an elasticity limit value σMD(N)
  • (Friction Coefficient μ Between Magnetic Surface and Back Surface)
  • A friction coefficient μ between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the surface of the back layer side of the magnetic recording medium 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as interlayer friction coefficient μ) is preferably 0.20≤μ≤0.80, more preferably 0.20≤μ≤0.78, and still more preferably 0.25≤μ≤0.75. When the friction coefficient μ is within the above range, handling properties of the magnetic recording medium 10 is improved. For example, when the friction coefficient μ is within the above range, the occurrence of winding deviation when the magnetic recording medium 10 is wound around the reel (for example, the reel 10C, etc., in FIG. 5) is suppressed. More specifically, in a case where the friction coefficient μ is too small (for example, in case of μ<0.15), an interlayer friction between a magnetic surface of a portion of the magnetic recording medium 10, which has already been wound around the cartridge reel, positioned on the outermost circumference and a back surface of the magnetic recording medium 10 to be newly wound around an outer side thereof is extremely low and thus the magnetic recording medium 10 to be newly wound may readily deviate from the magnetic surface of the portion position on the outermost circumference of the magnetic recording medium 10 which has already been wound. Therefore, winding deviation of the magnetic recording medium 10 occurs.
  • Meanwhile, in a case where the friction coefficient μ is too large (for example, in case of 0.85<μ or 0.80<μ), an interlayer friction between the back surface of the magnetic recording medium 10 which is to be definitely released from the outermost circumference of the reel on the drive side and the magnetic surface of the magnetic recording medium 10, which is positioned immediately thereunder and which is in a state of being wound yet on the reel on the drive side is extremely high, so the back surface and the magnetic surface are stuck to each other. Therefore, the operation of the magnetic recording medium 10 toward the cartridge reel becomes unstable, thereby causing winding deviation of the magnetic recording medium 10.
  • The friction coefficient μ is obtained as follows. First, the magnetic recording medium 10 having a width of ½ inches, with the back surface facing upward, is wound around a circumference having a diameter of 1 inch so as to be fixed. Next, the magnetic recording medium 10 having the width of ½ inches is brought into contact with the circumference at a wrap angle of) θ(°)=180°+1° to 180°−10° so that the magnetic surface thereof is in contact therewith and one end of the magnetic recording medium 10 is connected to a movable strain gauge and tension T0=0.6 (N) is given to the other end of the magnetic recording medium 10. The reading T1(N) to T8(N) of the movable strain gauge at each outward path when the magnetic recording medium 10 is reciprocated 8 times at 0.5 mm/s is measured, and an average value of T4 to T8 is determined as Tave(N). Thereafter, the friction coefficient μ is obtained from the following equation.
  • μ = 1 ( θ [ ° ] ) × ( π / 180 ) × log e ( T ave [ N ] T 0 [ N ] ) [ Equation 5 ]
  • (Surface Roughness Rab of Back Layer)
  • The surface roughness Rab[nm] (in other words, surface roughness of the back surface) of the back layer 14 is preferably 7.5 nm or less, more preferably 7.2 nm or less, still more preferably 7.0 nm or less, 6.5 nm or less, 6.3 nm or less, or 6.0 nm or less. Furthermore, the surface roughness Rab is preferably 3 nm or more, more preferably 3.2 nm or more, and still more preferably 3.4 nm or more. When the surface roughness Rab of the back layer is within the above range, handling properties of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be improved. Furthermore, when the magnetic recording medium 10 is wound, an influence on the surface of the magnetic layer can be reduced, and thus, an adverse effect on the electromagnetic conversion characteristic can be suppressed. The handling properties and electromagnetic conversion characteristic are contradictory properties, but the surface roughness Rab within the numerical range enables their compatibility.
  • The surface roughness Rab of the back surface is obtained as follows. First, the magnetic recording medium 10 having a width of ½ inches is prepared, and the magnetic recording medium 10 is attached to a slide glass, with the back surface facing upward (that is, the magnetic surface is attached to the slide glass) to use it as a sample piece. Next, surface roughness of the back surface of the sample piece is measured by the following non-contact roughness meter using optical interference.
  • Device: Non-contact roughness meter using optical interference (VertScan R5500GL-M100-AC, non-contact surface and layer cross-sectional shape measurement system, manufactured by Ryoka Systems Inc.)
  • Objective lens: 20 times (approximately 237 μm×178 μm field of view)
  • Resolution: 640 points×480 points
  • Measurement mode: phase
  • Wavelength filter: 520 nm
  • Surface correction: correction by quadratic polynomial approximation plane
  • As described above, surface roughness is measured at positions of at least five spots in the longitudinal direction, and an average value of each arithmetic average roughness Sa (nm), which is automatically calculated from a surface profile obtained at each position, is determined as the surface roughness Rab(nm) of the back surface.
  • (Coercive Force Hc)
  • The coercive force Hc measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 220 kA/m to 310 kA/m, more preferably 230 kA/m to 300 kA/, still more preferably 240 kA/m to 290 kA/m. When the coercive force Hc is 220 kA/m or more, the coercive force Hc becomes a sufficient magnitude, and thus, a degradation of a magnetic signal recorded on an adjacent track due to a leakage magnetic field from the recording head may be suppressed.
  • Therefore, a better SNR can be obtained. On the other hand, when the coercive force Hc is 310 kA/m or less, saturation recording by the recording head is facilitated, and thus, a better SNR can be obtained.
  • The coercive force Hc is obtained as follows. First, a measurement sample is cut out from the long-shaped magnetic recording medium 10 and an M-H loop of the entire measurement sample is measured in the thickness direction of the measurement sample (thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10) using a vibrating sample magnetometer (VSM). Next, the coating film (ground layer 12, magnetic layer 13, etc.) is wiped out using acetone, ethanol, or the like, to leave only the base layer 11 for background correction, and the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is measured in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 (the thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10) using the VSM. Thereafter, the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is subtracted from the M-H loop of the entire measurement sample to obtain an M-H loop after background correction. The coercive force Hc is obtained from the obtained M-H loop. Note that it is assumed that the measurement of the M-H loop is entirely performed at 25° C. Furthermore, it is also assumed that “demagnetizing field correction” when the M-H loop is measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • (Ratio R of Coercive Force Hc(50) and Coercive Force Hc(25))
  • The ratio R (=(Hc(50)/Hc(25))×100) between the coercive force Hc(50) measured at 50° C. in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 to the coercive force Hc(25) measured at 25° C. in the thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 95% or more, more preferably 96% or more, still more preferably 97% or more, and particularly preferably 98% or more. When the ratio R is 95% or more, temperature dependence of the coercive force Hc is small, and thus, deterioration of the SNR under a high temperature environment can be suppressed.
  • The coercive force Hc(25) is obtained in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc. Furthermore, the coercive force Hc(50) is obtained in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc except that the M-H loops of the measurement sample and the base layer 11 are all measured at 50° C.
  • (Squareness Ratio S1 Measured in Longitudinal Direction)
  • The squareness ratio S1 measured in the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 35% or less, more preferably 27% or less, and still more preferably 20% or less. When the squareness ratio S1 is 35% or less, vertical alignment of the magnetic powder is sufficiently high, and therefore, a better SNR can be obtained.
  • Therefore, better electromagnetic conversion characteristic can be obtained. Furthermore, a shape of the servo signal is improved, and thus, the control on the drive side may be performed more easily.
  • In this specification, the perpendicular alignment of the magnetic recording medium may mean that the squareness ratio S1 of the magnetic recording medium is within the above numerical range (for example, 35% or less). The magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is preferably perpendicularly aligned.
  • The squareness ratio S1 is obtained as follows. First, a measurement sample is cut out from a long-shaped magnetic recording medium 10, and an M-H loop of the entire measurement sample corresponding to the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is measured using the VSM. Next, the coating film (ground layer 12, magnetic layer 13, etc.) is wiped out using acetone, ethanol, or the like, to leave only the base layer 11 for background correction, and the M-H loop of the base layer 11 corresponding to the longitudinal direction of the base layer 11 (running direction of the magnetic recording medium 10) is measured using the VSM.
  • Thereafter, the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is subtracted from the M-H loop of the entire measurement sample to obtain an M-H loop after background correction. The squareness ratio S1(%) is calculated by substituting a saturation magnetization Ms(emu) and residual magnetization Mr(emu) of the obtained M-H loop into the following equation. Note that it is assumed that the measurement of the M-H loop is entirely performed at 25° C.

  • Squareness ratio S1(%)=(Mr/Ms)×100
  • (Squareness Ratio S2 Measured in Vertical Direction)
  • The squareness ratio S2 measured in the vertical direction (thickness direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is preferably 65% or more, more preferably 73% or more, and still more preferably 80% or more. When the squareness ratio S2 is 65% or more, vertical alignment of the magnetic powder is sufficiently high, and thus, a better SNR can be obtained.
  • Therefore, better electromagnetic conversion characteristic can be obtained. Furthermore, a servo signal shape is improved, making it easier to control a drive side.
  • In this specification, the perpendicular alignment of the magnetic recording medium may mean that the squareness ratio S2 of the magnetic recording medium is within the above numerical range (for example, 65% or more).
  • The squareness ratio S2 is obtained in a similar manner to the squareness ratio S1 except that the M-H loops are measured in the vertical direction (thickness direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 and the base layer 11. Note that, in the measurement of the squareness ratio S2, it is assumed that “demagnetizing field correction” when measuring the M-H loop is measured in the vertical direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • The squareness ratios S1 and S2 may be set to a desired value by adjusting, for example, strength of a magnetic field applied to the magnetic layer forming coating material, an application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer forming coating material, a dispersion state of the magnetic powder in the magnetic layer forming coating material, and a concentration of the solid content in the magnetic layer forming coating material. Specifically, for example, as the strength of the magnetic field is increased, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased. Furthermore, as the application time of the magnetic field is longer, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased.
  • Furthermore, as the dispersion state of the magnetic powder is improved, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased. Furthermore, as the concentration of the solid content is lowered, the squareness ratio S1 is reduced, while the squareness ratio S2 is increased.
  • Note that the above adjustment method may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • (SFD)
  • In a switching field distribution (SFD) curve of the magnetic recording medium 10, a peak ratio X/Y of a main peak height X and a height Y of a sub peak in the vicinity of magnetic field zero is preferably 3.0 or more, more preferably 5.0 or more, still more preferably 7.0 or more, particularly preferably 10.0 or more, and most preferably 20.0 or more (see FIG. 4). When the peak ratio X/Y is 3.0 or more, it is possible to suppress inclusion of a large amount of coercive force component (for example, soft magnetic particles, superparamagnetic particles, etc.) unique to ε iron oxide other than the ε iron oxide particles contributing to actual recording in the magnetic powder. Therefore, deterioration of magnetization signals recorded on the adjacent tracks due to a leakage magnetic field from the recording head is suppressed, and thus, a better SNR can be obtained. An upper limit value of the peak ratio X/Y is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 100 or less.
  • The peak ratio X/Y is obtained as follows. First, an M-H loop after background correction is obtained in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc described above.
  • Next, an SFD curve is calculated from the obtained M-H loop. The calculation of the SFD curve may be performed by using a program attached to the measurement device, or by using other programs.
  • Assuming that an absolute value of a point at which the calculated SFD curve traverses the Y axis (dM/dH) is “Y” and a height of the main peak seen in the vicinity of the coercive force Hc in the MH loop is “X”, a peak ratio X/Y is calculated. Note that the measurement of the M-H loop is performed at 25° C. in a manner similar to the method of measuring the coercive force Hc described above. Furthermore, it is also assumed that “demagnetizing field correction” when the M-H loop is measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • (Activation Volume Vact)
  • The activation volume Vact is preferably 8000 nm3 or less, more preferably 6000 nm3 or less, still more preferably 5000 nm3 or less, particularly preferably 4000 nm3 or less, and most preferably 3000 nm3 or less. When the activation volume Vact is 8000 nm3 or less, the dispersion state of the magnetic powder is improved, and thus, a bit reversal region can be made steep and a degradation of the magnetization signal recorded on the adjacent track due to a leakage magnetic field from the recording head may be suppressed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a better SNR may not be obtained.
  • The activation volume Vact is obtained by the following equation derived by Street&Woolley.

  • V act (nm3)=k B ×T×X irr/(μ0 ×Ms×S)
  • (where, kB: Boltzmann constant (1.38×10−23 J/K), T: temperature (K), Xirr: irreversible magnetic susceptibility, μ0: permeability of vacuum, S: magnetic viscosity coefficient, Ms: saturation magnetization (emu/cm3))
  • The irreversible magnetic susceptibility Xirr, the saturation magnetization Ms and the magnetic viscosity coefficient S substituted in the above equation are obtained as follows using the VSM. Note that the measurement direction by the VSM is the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10. Furthermore, it is assumed that the measurement by the VSM is performed at 25° C. for the measurement sample cut out from the long-shaped magnetic recording medium 10. Furthermore, it is also assumed that “demagnetizing field correction” when the M-H loop is measured in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic recording medium 10 is not performed.
  • (Irreversible Magnetic Susceptibility Xirr)
  • The irreversible magnetic susceptibility Xirr is defined as an inclination in the vicinity of the residual coercive force Hr in the inclination of the residual magnetization curve (DCD curve).
  • First, a magnetic field of −1193 kA/m (15 kOe) is applied to the entire magnetic recording medium 10, and the magnetic field is returned to zero to enter a residual magnetization state.
  • Thereafter, a magnetic field of about 15.9 kA/m (200 Oe) is applied in the opposite direction, and the magnetic field is returned again to zero and a residual magnetization amount is measured. Thereafter, similarly, a measurement of applying a magnetic field 15.9 kA/m larger than the immediately previously applied magnetic field and returning the magnetic field to zero is repeatedly performed, and a DCD curve is measured by plotting a residual magnetization amount against the applied magnetic field. From the obtained DCD curve, the point at which the magnetization amount is zero is set as the residual coercive force Hr, and an inclination of the DCD curve in each magnetic field is obtained by differentiating the DCD curve again. In the inclination of the DCD curve, the inclination near the residual coercive force Hr is Xirr.
  • (Saturation Magnetization Ms)
  • First, an M-H loop of the entire magnetic recording medium 10 (measurement sample) is measured in the thickness direction of the magnetic recording medium 10. Next, the coating film (ground layer 12, magnetic layer 13, etc.) is wiped out using acetone, ethanol, or the like, to leave only the base layer 11 for background correction, and the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is measured in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 similarly. Thereafter, the M-H loop of the base layer 11 is subtracted from the M-H loops of the entire magnetic recording medium 10 to obtain an M-H loop after background correction. Ms (emu/cm3) is calculated from the value of the saturation magnetization Ms (emu) of the obtained M-H loop and the volume (cm3) of the magnetic layer 13 in the measurement sample. Note that the volume of the magnetic layer 13 is obtained by multiplying the area of the measurement sample by the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13. A method of calculating the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 necessary for calculating the volume of the magnetic layer 13 will be described later.
  • (Magnetic Viscosity Coefficient S)
  • First, a magnetic field of −1193 kA/m (15 kOe) is applied to the entire magnetic recording medium 10 (measurement sample), and the magnetic field is returned to zero to enter a residual magnetization state. Thereafter, in the opposite direction, a magnetic field equivalent to the value of the residual coercive force Hr obtained from the DCD curve is applied. With the magnetic field applied, the magnetization amount is continuously measured at constant time intervals for 1000 seconds. A relationship between the time t and the magnetization amount M(t) thusly obtained is compared with the following equation to calculate the magnetic viscosity coefficient S.

  • M(t)=M0+S×ln(t)
  • (where M(t): magnetization amount at time t, M0: initial magnetization amount, S: magnetic viscosity coefficient, ln(t): natural logarithm of time)
  • (Arithmetic Mean Roughness Ra)
  • The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the magnetic surface is preferably 2.5 nm or less, and more preferably 2.0 nm or less.
  • When Ra is 2.5 nm or less, a better SNR can be obtained.
  • The arithmetic mean roughness Ra is obtained as follows. First, the surface of the side on which the magnetic layer 13 is provided is observed using an atomic force microscope (AFM) (Dimension Icon manufactured by Bruker Corporation) to obtain a cross-sectional profile. Next, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra is obtained from the obtained cross-sectional profile in accordance with JIS B0601: 2001.
  • (Standard Deviation σPES of PES Value)
  • The standard deviation σPES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium 10 according to the present embodiment of the present technology is 25 nm or less, preferably 23 nm or less, and more preferably 20 nm or less.
  • The position error signal (PES) indicates a deviation amount (error) of a reading position of the servo pattern in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 when the servo pattern is reproduced (when read) by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30. In order to precisely adjust tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction, linearity of a servo band when the servo pattern is read by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 is preferably as high as possible, that is, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value indicating a deviation amount of the reading position is preferably as low as possible. Because the standard deviation σPES of the PES value of the magnetic recording medium 10 according to the present embodiment of the present technology is low as described above, the linearity of the servo band is high and tension adjustment can be precisely performed.
  • The value of the standard deviation σPES of the PES value may be set to 25 nm or less by cutting the magnetic recording medium 10 such that an interval between the servo patterns is not changed as much as possible, changing a writing condition of a servo writer when the servo pattern is written into the magnetic recording medium 10, adjusting friction when the magnetic recording medium 10 and the servo writer slide, and the like, at the time of manufacturing of the magnetic recording medium 10.
  • Hereinafter, a method of measuring the standard deviation σPES of the PES value will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13.
  • A PES is measured to obtain the standard deviation σPES. For the PES measurement, a PES measurement head unit 300 shown in FIG. 12, for example, is prepared. As the head unit 300, a head for LTO2 (a head in conformity with the LTO2 standard) manufactured by HPE (Hewlett Packard Enterprise) is used. The head unit 300 has two head parts 300A and 300B arranged parallel to each other in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10. Each of the head parts includes a plurality of recording heads 340 for recording a data signal on the magnetic recording medium 10, a plurality of reproducing heads 350 for reproducing a data signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10, and a plurality of servo heads 320 for reproducing the servo signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10. Note that in a case where the head unit 300 is used only for PES measurement, the recording head 340 and the reproducing head 350 may not be included in the head unit.
  • First, a servo pattern in a predetermined servo band provided on the magnetic recording medium 10 is reproduced (read) using the head unit 300. Here, the servo head 320 of the head part 300A and the servo head 320 of the head part 300B sequentially face each servo pattern of the predetermined servo band, and the servo pattern is sequentially reproduced by these two servo heads 320. Here, a portion of the servo pattern recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10, which faces the servo head 320, is read and output as a servo signal.
  • As shown in FIG. 12, the PES value for each head part is calculated by the following equation for each servo frame.
  • PES ( um ] = X [ um ] - [ ( B a 1 - A a 1 ) + ( B a 2 - A a 2 ) + ( B a 3 - A a 3 ) + ( B a 4 - A a 4 ) + ( D a 1 - C a 1 ) + ( D a 2 - C a 2 ) + ( D a 3 - C a 3 ) + ( D a 4 - C a 4 ) ( C a 1 - A a 1 ) + ( C a 2 - A a 2 ) + ( C a 3 - A a 3 ) + ( C a 4 - A a 4 ) + ( A a 1 - C a 1 ) + ( A a 2 - C a 2 ) + ( A a 3 - C a 3 ) + ( A a 4 - C a 4 ) ] × Y [ um ] 2 × tan ϕ [ Equation 6 ]
  • Here, the center line shown in FIG. 12 is a center line of the servo bend.
  • X[μm] is a distance between a servo pattern A1 and a servo pattern B1 on the center line shown in FIG. 12 and Y[μm] is a distance between the servo pattern A1 and a servo pattern C1 on the center line shown in FIG. 12. X and Y may be obtained by developing the magnetic recording medium 10 with FERRICOLLOID developer and using a universal tool microscope (TOPCON TUM-220ES) and a data processing device (TOPCON CA-1B). 50 servo frames are selected at arbitrary positions of the tape in the length direction and X and Y are obtained in each servo frame and a simple average of 50 pieces of data is determined as X and Y used in the above calculation equation.
  • The above difference (Ba1−Aa1) indicates a time [sec] on actual path between the two corresponding servo patterns B1 and A1. Similarly, terms of other difference also indicate the time [sec] on the actual path between the two corresponding servo patterns. These times are obtained from a time between the timing signals obtained from the waveform of the servo signal and a tape running speed. In this specification, the actual path refer to a position where the servo signal reading head actually runs on the servo signal.
  • φ is an azimuth angle. φ is obtained by developing the magnetic recording medium 10 with FERRICOLLOID developer and using a universal tool microscope (TOPCON TUM-220ES) and a data processing device (TOPCON CA-1B).
  • In the present technology, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value is calculated using a servo signal corrected in a movement of the tape in a transverse direction. Furthermore, the servo signal is subjected to high pass filtering to reflect the trackability of the head. In the present technology, the standard deviation σPES is obtained by using a signal obtained by performing the above correction and the above high pass filtering on the servo signal, which is a so-called written in PESσ.
  • Hereinafter, a method of measuring the standard deviation σPES of the PES value will be described.
  • First, the servo signal is read by the head unit 300 over a certain range of 1 m of a data recording area of the magnetic recording medium 10. The signals obtained respectively by the heads 300A and 300B are subtracted as shown in FIG. 14 to obtain the servo signal corrected in a movement of the tape in the transverse direction. Then, high pass filtering is performed on the corrected servo signal. When the magnetic recording medium 10 is actually driven in a drive, a recording and reproducing head mounted on the drive moves in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 so as to follow the servo signal by the actuator. Because the written in PESσ is a noise value after adding the trackability of the head in the width direction, the above-mentioned high pass filtering is necessary. Therefore, although the high pass filter is not particularly limited, it is necessary to use a function that can reproduce trackability of the above-mentioned drive head in the width direction. The value of the PES is calculated for each servo frame according to the above calculation equation using the signal obtained by the high pass filtering. The standard deviation (written in PESσ) of the value of the PES calculated over the above 1 m is the standard deviation σPES of the PES value in the present technology, and the magnetic recording medium of this technology has a σPES of 25 nm or less.
  • (Friction Coefficient Between Surface of Magnetic Recording Medium on Magnetic Layer Side and LTO3 Head)
  • In the magnetic recording medium 10 according to the present embodiment of the present technology, in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 between the surface of the magnetic layer side and the head unit mounted in the LTO3 drive (also referred to as a “LOT3 head” in this specification) is performed 250 times, a maximum value μ1M of the friction coefficient μ1 is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5. The maximum value μ1M is more preferably 0.05 or more. The maximum value μ1M is more preferably 0.48 or less.
  • The maximum value μ1M is calculated by the equation described hereinafter from a measurement value of a movable strain gauge each time when the magnetic recording medium 10 whose magnetic surface is in contact with the LTO3 head is reciprocated 250 times while being slid with respect to the LTO3 head is calculated, and a maximum value of a plurality of calculated friction coefficients μ1 is μ1M. The LTO3 head manufactured by Hewlett Packard Enterprise (HPE) is used as the LTO3 head used for measuring μ1M.
  • Having the μ1M within the above numerical range, the magnetic recording medium 10 according to the present embodiment of the present technology can smoothly slide with the head of the recording and reproducing apparatus 30, and thus, tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction can be adjusted with high precision and the magnetic recording medium 10 can be stably driven. If μ1M is too large, the magnetic recording medium 10 may not be smoothly slid with respect to the head and width adjustment based on tension adjustment may also be affected. In a case where μ1M is too small, running stability may be affected by the occurrence of slip.
  • The value of μ1M may be set, for example, by adjusting the content of the material contained in the magnetic layer 13 (for example, carbon as an additive). For example, as the content of carbon in the magnetic layer 13 increases, μ1M can be reduced. Therefore, the value of σPES can be controlled by adjusting the friction coefficient μ1 by adjusting the content of carbon contained in the magnetic layer 13.
  • The friction coefficient μ1, and furthermore, the maximum value μ1M of μ1 may be obtained as follows.
  • First, as shown in FIG. 15, the magnetic recording medium 10 having a width of ½ inches is loaded so that a magnetic surface thereof is in contact with two cylindrical guide rollers having a diameter of 1 inch arranged parallel to and spaced apart from each other.
  • Next, the magnetic surface of the magnetic recording medium 10 is brought into contact with the LTO3 head such that a holding angle θ1(°)=10° (a contact angle of the magnetic recording medium 10 with respect to the LTO3 head is 160°), and one end of the magnetic recording medium 10 is connected to the movable strain gauge and the other end is given a tension T0=0.8 (N). Next, reading of the movable strain gauge in each outward way when the magnetic recording medium 10 slidably reciprocates with respect to the LTO3 head 250 times at 5 mm/s is set to T(N). Thereafter, the friction coefficient μ1 is obtained from the following equation.
  • μ 1 = 1 ( θ 1 [ ° ] ) × ( π / 180 ) × log e ( T [ N ] T 0 [ N ] ) [ Equation 7 ]
  • Finally, a maximum value of T(N) in all the outward ways when the magnetic recording medium 10 reciprocates 250 times is obtained as μ1M.
  • (4) Method of Manufacturing Magnetic Recording Medium
  • Next, a method of manufacturing the magnetic recording medium 10 having the above-described configuration will be described.
  • First, a ground layer-forming coating material is prepared by kneading and/or dispersing a non-magnetic powder, a binder, or the like, in a solvent. Next, the magnetic layer-forming coating material is prepared by kneading and/or dispersing the magnetic powder and the binder in a solvent. For the preparation of the magnetic layer-forming coating material and the ground layer-forming coating material, for example, the following solvents, a dispersing device and a kneading device may be used.
  • Examples of the solvents used for preparing the above-described coating material include ketone solvents such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, and the like; alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol and propanol; ester solvents such as methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, propyl acetate, ethyl lactate, ethylene glycol acetate, and the like; ether solvents such as diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, 2-ethoxyethanol, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, and the like; aromatic hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene, toluene and xylene; and halogenated hydrocarbon solvents such as methylene chloride, ethylene chloride, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, chlorobenzene, and the like. One of these may be used, or a mixture of two or more thereof may be used.
  • As the kneading device used in the preparation of the coating material preparation described above, for example, a kneading device such as a continuous biaxial kneader, a continuous biaxial kneader capable of diluting in multiple steps, a kneader, a press kneader, and a roll kneader may be used but the present technology is not particularly limited thereto.
  • Furthermore, examples of the dispersing device used in the preparation of the coating material preparation described above include roll mills, ball mills, horizontal sand mills, vertical sand mills, spike mills, pin mills, tower mills, pearl mills (for example, DCP Mill, manufactured by Nippon Eirich Co., Ltd., etc.), a homogenizer, an ultrasonic dispersing device, or the like, may be used, but the present technology is not particularly limited thereto.
  • Next, the ground layer-forming coating material is applied to one main surface of the base layer 11 and dried to form the ground layer 12. Subsequently, the magnetic layer-forming coating material is applied to the ground layer 12 and dried to form the magnetic layer 13 on the ground layer 12. Note that, at the time of drying, magnetic powder is magnetically aligned in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 by, for example, a solenoid coil. Furthermore, at the time of drying, for example, the magnetic powder may be magnetically aligned in the longitudinal direction (running direction) of the base layer 11 and then magnetically aligned in the thickness direction of the base layer 11 by a solenoid coil. After the formation of the magnetic layer 13, the back layer 14 is formed on the other main surface of the base layer 11. Accordingly, the magnetic recording medium 10 is obtained.
  • Thereafter, the obtained magnetic recording medium 10 is wound around a large-diameter core again and a curing treatment is performed thereon. Finally, calendering is performed on the magnetic recording medium 10, and thereafter, the magnetic recording medium 10 is cut into a predetermined width (for example, ½ inch width). As a result, a magnetic recording medium 10 of a desired elongated shape may be obtained.
  • (Servo Pattern)
  • An example of a servo pattern written in the magnetic layer 13 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a data band and a servo band formed in a magnetic layer 13 of a magnetic recording medium 10. FIG. 12 shows the servo pattern of each servo bend.
  • As shown in FIG. 11, the magnetic layer 13 has four data bands d0 to d3. The magnetic layer 13 has a total of five servo bands S0 to S4 so that each data band is sandwiched by two servo bands.
  • As shown in FIG. 12, each servo band repeatedly has a servo frame (one servo frame) including five linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns A1 to A5) that are inclined at a predetermined angle φ, five linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns B1 to B5) inclined at the same angle in the opposite direction of this signal, four linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns C1 to C4) inclined at a predetermined angle φ, and four linear servo patterns (for example, servo patterns D1 to D4) inclined at the same angle in the opposite direction of this signal. The predetermined angle φ may be, for example, 5° to 25°, and particularly 11° to 20°. For example, a track width L1 (see FIG. 11) of each of the servo bands S0 to S4 may be, for example, 250 μm or less, particularly 200 μm or less, and more particularly 150 μm or less, 130 μm or less or 110 μm or less. The track width L1 may be, for example, 70 μm or more, particularly 80 μm or more, and more particularly 90 μm or more.
  • The servo pattern described above is reproduced (read) by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 to be described later and is output as a servo signal. Tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction is adjusted on the basis of the servo signal obtained by reproducing the servo pattern by the recording and reproducing apparatus 30.
  • The above servo pattern is recorded (written) on the magnetic recording medium 10 by the servo writer, for example.
  • (5) Recording and Reproducing Apparatus [Configuration of Recording and Reproducing Apparatus]
  • Next, an example of a configuration of a recording and reproducing apparatus 30 that performs recording and reproducing of the magnetic recording medium 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 5.
  • The recording and reproducing apparatus 30 has a configuration capable of adjusting tension applied in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10. Furthermore, the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 has a configuration allowing the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A to be loaded therein. Here, in order to facilitate the description, a case where the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 has a configuration allowing one magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A to be loaded therein will be described, but the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 may be configured so that a plurality of magnetic recording medium cartridges 10A may be loaded therein.
  • The recording and reproducing apparatus 30 is connected to an information processing device such as a server 41 and a personal computer (hereinafter referred to as “PC”) 42 via a network 43, and is configured to record data supplied from these information processing devices in the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A. The shortest recording wavelength of the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 75 nm or less, still more preferably 60 nm or less, and particularly preferably 50 nm or less.
  • As illustrated in FIG. 5, the recording and reproducing apparatus includes a spindle 31, a reel 32 on the recording and reproducing apparatus side, a spindle driving device 33, a reel driving device 34, a plurality of guide rollers 35, a head unit 36, a communication interface (I/F) 37, and a control device 38.
  • The spindle 31 is configured to mount the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A. The magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A is compliant with the linear tape open (LTO) standard and rotatably accommodates a single reel 10C, around which the magnetic recording medium 10 is wound to be mounted, in a cartridge case 10B. In the magnetic recording medium 10, an inverted V-shaped servo pattern is recorded in advance as a servo signal. The reel 32 is configured to fix a leading end of the magnetic recording medium 10 drawn out from the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A.
  • The present technology also provides a magnetic recording cartridge including a magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology. In the magnetic recording cartridge, the magnetic recording medium may be wound around, for example, a reel.
  • The spindle driving device 33 is a device for rotationally driving the spindle 31. The reel driving device 34 is a device for rotationally driving the reel 32. When data is recorded to or reproduced from the magnetic recording medium 10, the spindle driving device 33 and the reel driving device 34 rotationally drive the spindle 31 and the reel 32 to cause the magnetic recording medium 10 to run. The guide roller 35 is a roller for guiding running of the magnetic recording medium 10.
  • The head unit 36 includes a plurality of recording heads for recording data signals to the magnetic recording medium 10, a plurality of reproducing heads for reproducing the data signals recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10, and a plurality of servo heads for reproducing a servo signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10. As the recording head, for example, a ring type head may be used, but the type of the recording head is not limited thereto.
  • The communication I/F 37 is for communicating with the information processing device such as the server 41 and the PC 42, and is connected to the network 43.
  • The control device 38 controls the entire recording and reproducing apparatus 30. For example, the control device 38 records the data signal supplied from the information processing device such as the server 41 or the PC 42 to the magnetic recording medium 10 by the head unit 36 in response to a request from the information processing device. Furthermore, the control device 38 reproduces the data signal recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 by the head unit 36 and supplies the reproduced data signal to the information processing apparatus, in response to the request from the information processing apparatus such as the server 41 and the PC 42.
  • Furthermore, the control device 38 detects a change in width of the magnetic recording medium 10 on the basis of the servo signal supplied from the head unit 36. More specifically, the magnetic recording medium 10 has a plurality of inverted V-shaped servo patterns recorded as servo signals thereon and the head unit 36 simultaneously reproduces two different servo patterns by the two servo heads on the head unit 36 and obtains each servo signal. A position of the head unit 36 is controlled to follow the servo pattern using the servo pattern and relative position information of the head unit obtained from this servo signal. At the same time, distance information between the servo patterns may be obtained by comparing the two servo signal waveforms. By comparing the distance information between the servo patterns obtained at the time of each measurement, a change in distance between the servo patterns at the time of each measurement may be obtained. By adding the distance information between the servo patterns at the time of servo pattern recording, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 may also be calculated. The control device 38 adjusts tension in a longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 so that the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 is a defined width or a substantially defined width by controlling rotation driving of the spindle driving device 33 and the reel driving device 34 on the basis of the change in the distance between the servo patterns obtained as described above or the calculated width of the magnetic recording medium 10. Accordingly, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 may be suppressed.
  • [Operation of Recording and Reproducing Apparatus]
  • Next, the operation of the recording and reproducing apparatus 30 having the above-described configuration will be described. First, the magnetic recording medium cartridge 10A is attached to the recording and reproducing apparatus 30, a leading end of the magnetic recording medium 10 is drawn out and transferred to the reel 32 through the plurality of guide rollers 35 and the head unit 36, and the leading end of the magnetic recording medium 10 is installed on the reel 32.
  • Next, when an operation unit (not shown) is operated, the spindle driving device 33 and the reel driving device 34 are driven under the control of the control device 38, and the spindle 31 and the reel 32 are rotated in the same direction so that the magnetic recording medium 10 runs from the reel 10C toward the reel 32. As a result, while the magnetic recording medium 10 is being wound around the reel 32, information is recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 or information recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 is reproduced by the head unit 36.
  • Furthermore, in a case where the magnetic recording medium 10 is rewound around the reel 10C, the spindle 31 and the reel 32 are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the above direction such that the magnetic recording medium 10 runs from the reel 32 to the reel 10C. Also, at the time of rewinding, the information is recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 or the information recorded on the magnetic recording medium 10 is reproduced by the head unit 36.
  • (6) Effect
  • The magnetic recording medium 10 according to the first embodiment has a layer structure includes a magnetic layer 13 and a base layer 11, and has an average thickness tT is tT≤5.6 μm, a dimensional change amount Δw in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw, a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer 13, a standard deviation σPES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from the servo signal whose servo pattern is reproduced is σPES 25 nm, and a maximum value μ1M of a friction coefficient μ1 when measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 between a surface on a magnetic layer side and an LTO3 head is performed 250 times is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5. Thereby, by adjusting tension of the magnetic recording medium 10 in the longitudinal direction by the recording and reproducing apparatus, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 can be suppressed, and further, good running stability may be caused in the recording and reproducing apparatus that performs the tension adjustment.
  • (7) Modification [Modification 1]
  • The magnetic recording medium 10 may further include a barrier layer 15 provided on at least one surface of the base layer 11 as shown in FIG. 7. The barrier layer 15 is a layer for suppressing a dimensional change in the base layer 11 depending on the environment. For example, moisture absorbency of the base layer 11 is an example of a cause of the dimensional change, and a penetration speed of moisture into the base layer 11 may be reduced by the barrier layer 15. The barrier layer 15 includes a metal or a metal oxide. As the metal, for example, at least one of Al, Cu, Co, Mg, Si, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Ni, Zn, Ga, Ge, Y, Zr, Mo, Ru, Pd, Ag, Ba, Pt, Au, or Ta may be used. As the metal oxide, for example, at least one of Al2O3, CuO, CoO, SiO2, Cr2O3, TiO2, Ta2O5, or ZrO2 may be used, and any of the oxides of the above metals may also be used. Furthermore, diamond-like carbon (DLC), diamond, and the like may also be used.
  • An average thickness of the barrier layer 15 is preferably 20 nm to 1000 nm, and more preferably 50 nm to 1000 nm. The average thickness of the barrier layer 15 is obtained in a manner similar to the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer 13.
  • However, a magnification of the TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to thicknesses of the barrier layer 15.
  • [Modification 2]
  • The magnetic recording medium 10 may be incorporated in a library apparatus. In other words, the present technology also provides a library apparatus including at least one magnetic recording medium 10. The library apparatus has a configuration capable of adjusting tension applied in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10, and may include a plurality of the recording and reproducing apparatuses 30 described above.
  • [Modification 3]
  • The magnetic recording medium 10 may be attached to servo signal write processing by a servo writer. The servo writer may adjust tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 when recording a servo signal or the like, thereby keeping the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 constant or substantially constant. In this case, the servo writer may have a detection device for detecting the width of the magnetic recording medium 10. The servo writer may adjust the tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10 on the basis of a detection result from the detection device.
  • 3. Second Embodiment (Example of Vacuum Thin Film Type Magnetic Recording Medium) (1) Configuration of Magnetic Recording Medium
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment is a long, vertical magnetic recording medium and includes a film type base layer 111, a soft magnetic underlayer 112 (hereinafter referred to as SUL), a first seed layer 113A, a second seed layer 113B, a first ground layer 114A, a second ground layer 114B, and a magnetic layer 115 as illustrated in FIG. 8. The SUL 112, the first and second seed layers 113A and 113B, first and second ground layers 114A and 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 may be, for example, vacuum thin films such as layers formed by sputtering (hereinafter also referred to as “sputtered layer”), or the like.
  • The SUL 112, the first and second seed layers 113A and 113B, and the first and second ground layer 114A and 114B are provided between one main surface of the base layer 111 (hereinafter referred to as “surface”) and the magnetic layer 115, and the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, and the second ground layer 114B are stacked in this order from the base layer 111 toward the magnetic layer 115.
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 may further include a protective layer 116 provided on the magnetic layer 115 and a lubricating layer 117 provided on the protective layer 116 as necessary. Furthermore, the magnetic recording medium 110 may further include a back layer 118 provided on the other main surface (hereinafter referred to as “back surface”) of the base layer 111 as necessary.
  • Hereinafter, the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 110 (longitudinal direction of the base layer 111) is referred to as a machine direction (MD). Here, the machine direction refers to a relative movement direction of a recording and reproducing head with respect to the magnetic recording medium 110, that is, the direction in which the magnetic recording medium 110 runs at the time of recording and reproduction.
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment is preferably used as a storage medium for a data archive, which is expected to increase in demand in the future. This magnetic recording medium 110 may realize a surface recording density of 10 times or more, that is, a surface recording density of 50 Gb/in2 or more, for example, of the current coating type magnetic recording medium for storage. In a case where a general linear recording type data cartridge is configured using the magnetic recording medium 110 having such a surface recording density, a large capacity recording of 100 TB or more per data cartridge may be realized.
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment is preferably used in a recording and reproducing apparatus (recording and reproducing apparatus for recording and reproducing data) having a ring-type recording head and a giant magnetoresistive (GMR) type reproducing head or a tunneling magnetoresistive (TMR) type reproducing head. Furthermore, it is preferable that the magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment uses a ring-type recording head as the servo signal write head. In the magnetic layer 115, for example, a data signal is vertically recorded by a ring-type recording head. Furthermore, in the magnetic layer 115, for example, a servo signal is vertically recorded by the ring-type recording head.
  • (2) Description of Each Layer (Base Layer)
  • The description regarding the base layer 11 in the first embodiment is applied to the base layer 111, and a description regarding the base layer 111 is thus omitted.
  • (SUL)
  • The SUL 112 contains a soft magnetic material in an amorphous state. The soft magnetic material includes, for example, at least one of a Co-based material or an Fe-based material. The Co-based material includes, for example, CoZrNb, CoZrTa, or CoZrTaNb. The Fe-based material includes, for example, FeCoB, FeCoZr, or FeCoTa.
  • The SUL 112 is a single-layer SUL, and is provided directly on the base layer 111. An average thickness of the SUL 112 is preferably 10 nm or more to 50 nm or less, and more preferably 20 nm or more and 30 nm or less.
  • The average thickness of the SUL 112 is obtained by the same method as the method of measuring the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. Note that average thicknesses of layers other than the SUL 112, as described later (in other words, average thicknesses of first and second seed layers 113A and 113B, first and second ground layers 114A and 114B, and a magnetic layer 115) are also obtained by the same method as the method of measuring the average thickness of the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of each layer.
  • (First and Second Seed Layers)
  • The first seed layer 113A contains an alloy containing Ti and Cr, and has an amorphous state. Furthermore, this alloy may further contain O (oxygen). The oxygen may be impurity oxygen contained in a small amount in the first seed layer 113A when the first seed layer 113A is formed by a film forming method such as a sputtering method or the like.
  • Here, the “alloy” means at least one of a solid solution, a eutectic material, an intermetallic compound, or the like, containing Ti and Cr. The “amorphous state” means a state in which a halo is observed by X-ray diffraction, electron beam diffraction method or the like, and a crystal structure may not be specified.
  • An atomic ratio of Ti to a total amount of Ti and Cr contained in the first seed layer 113A is preferably 30 atomic % or more and less than 100 atomic %, and more preferably 50 atomic % or more and less than 100 atomic %. When the atomic ratio of Ti is less than 30 atomic %, a (100) plane of a body-centered cubic lattice (bcc) structure of Cr is aligned, so that there is a possibility that alignment of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B formed on the first seed layer 113A will be reduced.
  • The atomic ratio of Ti is obtained as follows. Depth direction analysis (depth profile measurement) of the first seed layer 113A by auger electron spectroscopy (hereinafter referred to as “AES”) is performed while ion-milling the magnetic recording medium 110 from the magnetic layer 115 side. Next, an average composition (average atomic ratio) of Ti and Cr in the film thickness direction is obtained from the obtained depth profile. Next, the atomic ratio of Ti is obtained using the obtained average composition of Ti and Cr.
  • In a case where the first seed layer 113A contains Ti, Cr and O, an atomic ratio of 0 to a total amount of Ti, Cr and O contained in the first seed layer 113A is preferably 15 atomic % or less, and more preferably Is 10 atomic % or less. In a case where the atomic ratio of 0 exceeds 15 atomic %, TiO2 crystals are formed, which affects nucleation of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B formed on the first seed layer 113A, so that there is a possibility that the alignment of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B will be reduced. The atomic ratio of O is obtained using a method similar to a method of analyzing the atomic ratio of Ti.
  • The alloy contained in the first seed layer 113A may further contain an element other than Ti and Cr as an additional element. This additional element may be, for example, one or more elements selected from the group including Nb, Ni, Mo, Al, and W.
  • The average thickness of the first seed layer 113A is preferably 2 nm to 15 nm, and more preferably 3 nm to 10 m.
  • The second seed layer 113B contains, for example, NiW or Ta, and has a crystalline state. The average thickness of the second seed layer 113B is preferably 3 nm to 20 nm, and more preferably 5 nm to 15 nm.
  • The first and second seed layers 113A and 113B have a crystal structure similar to that of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B, and are not seed layers provided for the purpose of crystal growth, but are seed layers improving vertical alignment of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B by amorphous states of the first and second seed layers 113A and 113B.
  • (First and Second Ground Layers)
  • It is preferable that the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B have a crystal structure similar as that of the magnetic layer 115. In a case where the magnetic layer 115 contains a Co-based alloy, it is preferable that the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B contain a material having a hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure similar to that of the Co-based alloy and a c axis of the hcp structure is aligned in a direction (that is, film thickness direction) perpendicular to a film surface. The reason is because the alignment of the magnetic layer 115 can be improved and matching in a lattice constant between the second ground layer 114B and the magnetic layer 115 can be made relatively good. As the material having the hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure, it is preferable to use a material containing Ru, and specifically, it is preferable to use Ru alone or use a Ru alloy. Examples of the Ru alloy can include Ru alloy oxides such as Ru—SiO2, Ru—TiO2, Ru—ZrO2, and the like, and the Ru alloy may be any one of Ru—SiO2, Ru—TiO2, and Ru—ZrO2.
  • As described above, similar materials can be used as the materials of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B. However, intended effects of each of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B are different from each other.
  • Specifically, the second ground layer 114B has a film structure promoting a granular structure of the magnetic layer 115 which is an upper layer of the second ground layer 114B, and the first ground layer 114A has a film structure with a high crystal alignment. In order to obtain such a film structure, it is preferable that film forming conditions such as sputtering conditions or the like of each of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B are made to be different from each other. The average thickness of the first ground layer 114A is preferably 3 nm to 15 nm or less, and more preferably 5 nm to 10 nm. The average thickness of the second ground layer 114B is preferably 7 nm to 40 nm, and more preferably 10 nm to 25 nm.
  • (Magnetic Layer)
  • The magnetic layer (also referred to as a recording layer) 115 may be a vertical magnetic recording layer in which a magnetic material is vertically aligned. It is preferable that the magnetic layer 115 is a granular magnetic layer containing a Co-based alloy, in terms of improvement of a recording density. The granular magnetic layer contains ferromagnetic crystal particles containing the Co-based alloy and nonmagnetic grain boundaries (nonmagnetic material) surrounding the ferromagnetic crystal particles. More specifically, the granular magnetic layer contains columns (columnar crystal) containing a Co-based alloy and nonmagnetic grain boundaries (for example, oxides such as SiO2) surrounding the columns and magnetically separating the respective columns from each other. In this structure, the magnetic layer 115 having a structure in which the respective columns are magnetically separated from each other may be configured.
  • The Co-based alloy has a hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure, and a c-axis of the hcp structure is aligned in the direction (film thickness direction) perpendicular to the film surface. As the Co-based alloy, it is preferable to use a CoCrPt-based alloy containing at least Co, Cr, and Pt. The CoCrPt-based alloy may further contain an additive element. Examples of the additive element can include one or more elements selected from the group including Ni and Ta.
  • The nonmagnetic grain boundaries surrounding the ferromagnetic crystal grains contain a nonmagnetic metallic material. Here, the metal includes a metalloid. As the nonmagnetic metal material, for example, at least one of a metal oxide or a metal nitride can be used, and it is preferable to use the metal oxide, in terms of more stable maintenance of the granular structure. Examples of the metal oxide can include metal oxides containing one or more elements selected from the group including Si, Cr, Co, Al, Ti, Ta, Zr, Ce, Y, Hf, and the like, and the metal oxide is preferably a metal oxide including at least Si oxide (that is, SiO2). Specific examples of the metal oxide can include SiO2, Cr2O3, CoO, Al2O3, TiO2, Ta2O5, ZrO2, HfO2, and the like. Examples of the metal nitride can include metal nitrides containing one or more elements selected from the group including Si, Cr, Co, Al, Ti, Ta, Zr, Ce, Y, Hf, and the like. Specific examples of the metal nitride can include SiN, TiN, AlN, and the like.
  • It is preferable that the CoCrPt-based alloy contained in the ferromagnetic crystal particle and the Si oxide contained in the nonmagnetic grain boundary have an average composition represented in the following Formula (1). The reason is because a saturation magnetization amount Ms in which an influence of a demagnetizing field can be suppressed and a sufficient reproduction output can be obtained can be realized, resulting in further improvement of recording and reproduction characteristics.

  • (CoxPtyCr100-x-y)100-z—(SiO2)z  (1)
  • (where in General Formula (1), x, y, and z are values within ranges in which 69≤x≤75, 10≤y≤16, and 9≤Z≤12 are satisfied, respectively).
  • Note that the above composition can be obtained as follows. An average composition (average atomic ratio) of Co, Pt, Cr, Si, and O in the film thickness direction is obtained by performing the depth direction analysis on the magnetic layer 115 by the AES while ion-milling the magnetic recording medium 110 from the magnetic layer 115 side.
  • An average thickness tm [nm] of the magnetic layer 115 is preferably 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm, more preferably 9 nm≤tm≤20 nm, and still more preferably 9 nm≤tm≤15 nm. The average thickness tm of the magnetic layer 13 is within the above numerical range, so that electromagnetic conversion characteristics can be improved.
  • (Protective Layer)
  • The protective layer 116 contains, for example, a carbon material or silicon dioxide (SiO2), and it is preferable that the protective layer 116 contains a carbon material in view of film strength of the protective layer 116. Examples of the carbon material include graphite, diamond-like carbon (DLC), diamond, or the like.
  • (Lubricating Layer)
  • The lubricating layer 117 contains at least one lubricant. The lubricating layer 117 may further contain various additives, for example, a rust inhibitor, as necessary. A lubricant has at least two carboxyl groups and one ester bond, and contains at least one of carboxylic acid-based compounds represented by the following General Formula (1). The lubricant may further contain a lubricant other than the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by the following General Formula (1).
  • General Formula (1):
  • Figure US20200342901A1-20201029-C00001
  • (where, Rf is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group, Es is an ester bond, R may be absent, but is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated hydrocarbon group).
  • It is preferable that the carboxylic acid-based compound is represented by the following General formula (2) or (3).
  • General Formula (2):
  • Figure US20200342901A1-20201029-C00002
  • (where, Rf is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group).
  • General Formula (3):
  • Figure US20200342901A1-20201029-C00003
  • (where, Rf is an unsubstituted or substituted saturated or unsaturated fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group or a hydrocarbon group).
  • It is preferable that the lubricant contains one or both of the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by the above General Formulas (2) and (3).
  • When the lubricant containing the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by General Formula (1) is coated on the magnetic layer 115, the protective layer 116 or the like, a lubricating action is exhibited by cohesion between the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon groups or the hydrocarbon groups Rf, which are hydrophobic groups. In a case where the Rf group is the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group, it is preferable that a total carbon number is 6 to 50 and a total carbon number of a fluorinated hydrocarbon group is 4 to 20. The Rf group may be, for example, a saturated or unsaturated straight chain, branched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon group, but may preferably be a saturated straight chain hydrocarbon group.
  • For example, in a case where the Rf group is the hydrocarbon group, it is preferable that the Rf group is a group represented by the following General Formula (4).
  • General Formula (4):
  • Figure US20200342901A1-20201029-C00004
  • (where in General Formula (4), 1 is an integer selected from the range of 8 to 30, and more preferably 12 to 20).
  • Furthermore, in a case where the Rf group is the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group, it is preferable that the Rf group is group represented by following General formula (5).
  • General Formula (5):
  • Figure US20200342901A1-20201029-C00005
  • (where in General Formula (5), m and n are, respectively, integers independently selected from each other within the following ranges: m: 2 to 20, n: 3 to 18, and more preferably m: 4 to 13, n: 3 to 10).
  • The fluorinated hydrocarbon group may be concentrated at one position in the molecule as described above or may be dispersed as in the following General Formula (6), and may be —CHF2, —CHF—, or the like, as well as —CF3 or —CF2—.
  • General Formula (6):
  • Figure US20200342901A1-20201029-C00006
  • (where in General Formulas (5) and (6), n1+n2=n and m1+m2=m).
  • The reason why the number of carbon atoms in General Formulas (4), (5), and (6) is limited as described above is because when the number (l or the sum of m and n) of carbon atoms constituting an alkyl group or a fluorine-containing alkyl group is equal to or more than the above lower limit, a length becomes an appropriate length, so that the cohesion between the hydrophobic groups is effectively exhibited and friction and wear durability is improved. Furthermore, the reason is because when the number of carbon atoms is equal to or less than the above upper limit, solubility in a solvent of a lubricant including the carboxylic acid-based compound is kept good.
  • In particular, when the Rf group in General Formulas (1), (2) and (3) contains a fluorine atom, there is an effect in reducing a friction coefficient and improving traveling performance.
  • However, it is preferable to provide a hydrocarbon group between the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group and the ester bond to separate the fluorine-containing hydrocarbon group and the ester bond from each other, thereby securing stability of the ester bond and preventing hydrolysis.
  • Furthermore, the Rf group may have a fluoroalkyl ether group or a perfluoropolyether group.
  • An R group in General Formula (1) may be absent, but in a case where the R group in General Formula (1) is present, it is preferably a hydrocarbon chain having a relatively small number of carbon atoms.
  • Furthermore, the Rf group or R group contains one element or a plurality of elements selected from the group including nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, and halogen as constituent elements, and may further have a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, and a carbonyl group, an amino group, an ester bond, and the like, in addition to the functional group described above.
  • It is preferable that the carboxylic acid-based compound represented by General Formula (1) is specifically at least one of the compounds shown below. In other words, it is preferable that the lubricant contains at least one of the compounds shown below.

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)10COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)3(CH2)10COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • C17H35COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)2COOCH2CH(C18H37)COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CHF2(CF2)7COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)2COOCH2CH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)6COOCH2CH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)11COOCH2CH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)3(CH2)6COOCH2CH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • C18H37COOCH2CH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)4COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)3(CH2)4COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)3(CH2)7COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)9(CH2)10COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7(CH2)12COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)5(CH2)10COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7CH(C9H19)CH2CH═CH(CH2)7COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CF3(CF2)7CH(C6H13)(CH2)7COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH

  • CH3(CH2)3(CH2CH2CH(CH2CH2(CF2)9CF3))2(CH2)7COOCH(COOH)CH2COOH
  • The carboxylic acid-based compound represented by the General Formula (1) is soluble in a non-fluorinated solvent having a small load on an environment, and has an advantage that an operation such as coating, immersion, spraying, or the like, can be performed using a general-purpose solvent such as, for example, a hydrocarbon-based solvent, a ketone-based solvent, an alcohol-based solvent, an ester-based solvent, and the like. Specifically, examples of the general-purpose solvent can include hexane, heptane, octane, decane, dodecane, benzene, toluene, xylene, cyclohexane, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, cyclohexanone, and the like.
  • In a case where the protective layer 116 contains a carbon material, when the carboxylic acid-based compound is coated on the protective layer 116 as a lubricant, two carboxyl groups and at least one ester bond group, which are polar group parts of lubricant molecules, can be adsorbed on the protective layer 116 to form a particularly durable lubricating layer 117 by cohesion between hydrophobic groups.
  • Note that the lubricant is held not only on the surface of the magnetic recording medium 110 as the lubricating layer 117 as described above, but may also be contained and held in layers such as the magnetic layer 115, the protective layer 116 and the like constituting the magnetic recording medium 110.
  • (Back Layer)
  • The description regarding the back layer 14 in the first embodiment is applied to the back layer 118.
  • (3) Physical Properties and Structure
  • All of the descriptions regarding the physical properties and the structure described in the above (3) of 2. are also applied to the second embodiment. For example, the average thickness tT, the dimensional change amount Δw, the thermal expansion coefficient α, the humidity expansion coefficient β, the Poisson's ratio ρ, the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction, the friction coefficient μ between the magnetic surface and the back surface, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value, the friction coefficient μ1, the maximum value μ1M of the magnetic recording medium 110, and the surface roughness Rab of the back layer 118 may be similar to those in the first embodiment. Therefore, a description of the physical properties and the structure of the magnetic recording medium of the second embodiment are omitted.
  • (4) Configuration of Sputtering Apparatus
  • Hereinafter, an example of a configuration of a sputtering apparatus 120 used for manufacturing the magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9. The sputtering apparatus 120 is a continuous winding type sputtering used for forming the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115, and includes a film forming chamber 121, a drum 122, which is a metal can (rotary body), cathodes 123 a to 123 f, a supply reel 124, a winding reel 125, and a plurality of guide rolls 127 a to 127 c and 128 a to 128 c, as shown in FIG. 9. The sputtering apparatus 120 is, for example, an apparatus using a DC (direct current) magnetron sputtering manner, but the sputtering manner is not limited thereto.
  • The film forming chamber 121 is connected to a vacuum pump (not shown) through an exhaust port 126, and the atmosphere in the film forming chamber 121 is set to a predetermined degree of vacuum by the vacuum pump. The drum 122 having a rotatable configuration, the supply reel 124, and the winding reel 125 are arranged in the film forming chamber 121. The plurality of guide rolls 127 a to 127 c for guiding conveyance of the base layer 111 between the supply reel 124 and the drum 122 and the plurality of guide rolls 128 a to 128 c for guiding conveyance of the base layer 111 between the drum 122 and the winding reel 125 are provided in the film forming chamber 121. At the time of sputtering, the base layer 111 unwound from the supply reel 124 is wound around the winding reel 125 through the guide rolls 127 a to 127 c, the drum 122, and the guide rolls 128 a to 128 c. The drum 122 has a cylindrical shape, and the long base layer 111 is conveyed along a circumferential surface of the cylindrical surface of the drum 122. The drum 122 is provided with a cooling mechanism (not shown), and is cooled to, for example, about −20° C. at the time of the sputtering. A plurality of cathodes 123 a to 123 f is arranged in the film forming chamber 121 so as to face the circumferential surface of the drum 122 Target are set on the cathodes 123 a to 123 f, respectively. Specifically, targets for forming the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 are set on the cathodes 123 a, 123 b, 123 c, 123 d, 123 e, and 123 f, respectively. A plurality of types of films, that is, the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 are simultaneously formed by these cathodes 123 a to 123 f.
  • In the sputtering apparatus 120 having the configuration described above, the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 are continuously formed by a RolltoRoll method.
  • (5) Method of Manufacturing Magnetic Recording Medium
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment can be manufactured, for example, as follows.
  • First, the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 are sequentially formed on a surface of the base layer 111 using the sputtering apparatus 120 shown in FIG. 9. Specifically, the films are formed as follows. First, the film forming chamber 121 is evacuated to a predetermined pressure. Thereafter, the targets set on the cathodes 123 a to 123 f are sputtered while a process gas such as an Ar gas or the like is introduced into the film forming chamber 121 Therefore, the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 are sequentially formed on the surface of the traveling base layer 111.
  • The atmosphere of the film forming chamber 121 at the time of the sputtering is set to, for example, about 1×10−5 Pa to 5×10−5 Pa. Film thicknesses and characteristics of the SUL 112, the first seed layer 113A, the second seed layer 113B, the first ground layer 114A, the second ground layer 114B, and the magnetic layer 115 can be controlled by adjusting a tape line speed at which the base layer 111 is wound, a pressure (sputtering gas pressure) of the process gas such as the Ar gas or the like introduced at the time of the sputtering, supplied power, and the like.
  • Next, the protective layer 116 is formed on the magnetic layer 115. As a method of forming the protective layer 116, for example, a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) method or a physical vapor deposition (PVD) method can be used.
  • Next, a binder, inorganic particles, a lubricant, and the like are kneaded and dispersed in a solvent to prepare a coating material for forming a back layer. Next, the back layer 118 is formed on the back surface of the base layer 111 by applying the coating material for forming a back layer on the back surface of the base layer 111 and then drying the coating material.
  • Next, for example, the lubricant is coated on the protective layer 116 to form the lubricating layer 117. As a method of coating the lubricant, for example, various coating methods such as gravure coating, dip coating and the like can be used. Next, the magnetic recording medium 110 is cut into a predetermined width, as necessary. Thus, the magnetic recording medium 110 shown in FIG. 8 is obtained.
  • (6) Effect
  • In the magnetic recording medium 110 according to the second embodiment, a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 110 can be suppressed by adjusting tension in a longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 110 by the recording and reproducing apparatus, similar to the first embodiment. For example, even if there is a change in temperature and humidity that may cause a change in the width of the magnetic recording medium 110, the width of the magnetic recording medium 110 can be kept constant or substantially constant. The change in width by the tension adjustment may be suppressed even after long-term storage. Moreover, although the magnetic recording medium 110 is as thin as tT≤5.6 μm, the magnetic recording medium 110 is excellent in handling properties.
  • (7) Modification
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 may further include a ground layer between the base layer 111 and the SUL 112. Since the SUL 112 has the amorphous state, the SUL 112 does not play a role of promoting epitaxial growth of a layer formed on the SUL 112, but is desired not to disturb the crystal alignment of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B formed on the SUL 112. For this purpose, it is preferable that the soft magnetic material has a fine structure that does not form a column, but in a case where an influence of the release of a gas such as moisture or the like from the base layer 111 is large, the soft magnetic material may be coarsened to disturb the crystal alignment of the first and second ground layers 114A and 114B formed on the SUL 112. In order to suppress the influence of the release of the gas such as moisture or the like from the base layer 111, it is preferable that the ground layer containing an alloy containing Ti and Cr and an having amorphous state is provided between the base layer 111 and the SUL 112, as described above. As a specific configuration of the ground layer, a configuration similar to that of the first seed layer 113A of the second embodiment can be adopted.
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 may not include at least one of the second seed layer 113B or the second ground layer 114B. However, it is more preferable that the magnetic recording medium 110 includes both of the second seed layer 113B and the second base layer 114B, in terms of improvement a SNR.
  • The magnetic recording medium 110 may include an antiparallel coupled SUL (APC-SUL) instead of the single-layer SUL.
  • 4. Third Embodiment (Example of Vacuum Thin Film Type Magnetic Recording Medium) (Configuration of Magnetic Recording Medium)
  • A magnetic recording medium 130 according to a third embodiment includes a base layer 111, a SUL 112, a seed layer 131, a first ground layer 132A, a second ground layer 132B, and a magnetic layer 115, as shown in FIG. 10. Note that, in the third embodiment, the same parts as those in the second embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals and a description thereof will be omitted.
  • The SUL 112, the seed layer 131, and the first and second ground layers 132A and 132B are provided between one main surface of the base layer 111 and the magnetic layer 115, and the SUL 112, the seed layer 131, the first ground layer 132A, and the second ground layer 132B are sequentially stacked from the base layer 111 toward the magnetic layer 115.
  • (Seed Layer)
  • The seed layer 131 contains Cr, Ni, and Fe, and has a face-centered cubic lattice (fcc) structure, and a (111) plane of the face-centered cubic lattice structure is preferentially aligned so as to be parallel with a surface of the base layer 111. Here, the preferential alignment means a state in which a diffraction peak intensity from the (111) plane of the face-centered cubic lattice structure is larger than diffraction peaks from other crystal planes in a θ-2θ scan of an X-ray diffraction method or a state in which only the diffraction peak intensity from the (111) plane of the face-centered cubic lattice structure is observed in the θ-2θ scan of the X-ray diffraction method.
  • An intensity ratio of X-ray diffraction of the seed layer 131 is preferably 60 cps/nm or more, more preferably 70 cps/nm or more, and still more preferably 80 cps/nm or more, in terms of improvement of the SNR. Here, the intensity ratio of the X-ray diffraction of the seed layer 131 is a value (I/D) (cps/nm)) obtained by dividing an intensity I(cps) of the X-ray diffraction of the seed layer 131 by an average thickness D (nm) of the seed layer 131.
  • It is preferable that Cr, Ni, and Fe contained in the seed layer 131 have an average composition represented by the following Formula (2).

  • CrX(NiYFe100-Y)100-X  (2)
  • (where in Formula (2), X is in the range in which 10≤X≤45 is satisfied, Y is in the range in which 60≤Y≤90 is satisfied). When X is in the above range, (111) alignment of a face-centered cubic lattice structure of Cr, Ni, and Fe is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained. Similarly, when Y is in the above range, the (111) alignment of the face-centered cubic lattice structure of Cr, Ni, and Fe is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • It is preferable that the average thickness of the seed layer 131 is 5 nm or more to 40 nm or less. By setting the average thickness of the seed layer 131 to be in this range, the (111) alignment of the face-centered cubic lattice structure of Cr, Ni, and Fe is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained. Note that the average thickness of the seed layer 131 is obtained in a manner similar to that of the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the seed layer 131.
  • (First and Second Ground Layers)
  • The first ground layer 132A contains Co and O having a face-centered cubic lattice structure, and has a column (columnar crystal) structure. In the first ground layer 132A containing Co and O, substantially an effect (function) substantially similar to that of the second ground layer 132B containing Ru is obtained. A concentration ratio of an average atomic concentration of O to an average atomic concentration of Co ((average atomic concentration of O)/(average atomic concentration of Co)) is 1 or more. When the concentration ratio is 1 or more, the effect of providing the first base layer 132A is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • It is preferable that the column structure is inclined in terms of improvement of the SNR. It is preferable that a direction of the inclination is a longitudinal direction of the long-shaped magnetic recording medium 130. The reason why it is preferable that the direction of the inclination is the longitudinal direction is as follows. The magnetic recording medium 130 according to the present embodiment is a so-called magnetic recording medium for linear recording, and a recording track is parallel with the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130. Furthermore, the magnetic recording medium 130 according to the present embodiment is also a so-called perpendicular magnetic recording medium, and it is preferable that a crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 is perpendicular in terms of recording characteristics, but an inclination may be generated in the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 due to an influence of an inclination of the column structure of the first ground layer 132A. In the magnetic recording medium 130 for linear recording, in a relationship with the head magnetic field at the time of recording, the influence of the inclination of the crystal alignment axis on the recording characteristics can be reduced in a configuration in which the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130 as compared with a configuration in which the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 is inclined in the width direction of the magnetic recording medium 130. In order to incline the crystal alignment axis of the magnetic layer 115 in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130, it is preferable that the inclination direction of the column structure of the first ground layer 132A is the longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 130 as described above.
  • It is preferable that the inclination angle of the column structure is larger than 0° and is 60° or less. In the range in which the inclination angle is large than 0° and is 60° or less, a change in a tip shape of the column contained in the first ground layer 132A is large, so that the tip shape becomes substantially a triangular shape. Therefore, an effect of the granular structure tends to be improved, noise tends to be reduced, and the SNR tends to be improved. On the other hand, when the inclination angle exceeds 60°, the change in the tip shape of the column contained in the first foundation layer 132A is small, so that it is difficult for the tip shape to become substantially a triangular shape. Therefore, a noise reduction effect tends to be degraded.
  • An average particle diameter of the column structure is 3 nm or more to 13 nm or less. When the average particle size is less than 3 nm, the average particle size of the column structure included in the magnetic layer 115 is reduced, and thus, there is a possibility that an ability to hold a record with a current magnetic material will be deteriorated. On the other hand, when the average particle size is 13 nm or less, the noise is suppressed, so that a better SNR can be obtained.
  • An average thickness of the first ground layer 132A is preferably 10 nm or more to 150 nm or less. When the average thickness of the first ground layer 132A is 10 nm or more, (111) alignment of the face-centered cubic lattice structure of the first ground layer 132A is improved, so that a better SNR can be obtained. On the other hand, when the average thickness of the first ground layer 132A is 150 nm or less, an increase in a particle diameter of the column can be suppressed. Therefore, the noise is suppressed, so that a better SNR can be obtained. Note that the average thickness of the first ground layer 132A is obtained in a manner similar to the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the first ground layer 132A.
  • It is preferable that the second ground layer 132B has a crystal structure similar to that of the magnetic layer 115. In a case where the magnetic layer 115 contains a Co-based alloy, the second ground layer 132B contains a material having a hexagonal closest-packed (hcp) structure similar to that of the Co-based alloy, and it is preferable that a c-axis of the hcp structure is aligned in a direction (that is, a film thickness direction) perpendicular to a film surface. The reason is because alignment of the magnetic layer 115 can be improved and matching in a lattice constant between the second ground layer 132B and the magnetic layer 115 can be made relatively good. As the material having the hexagonal closest-packed structure, it is preferable to use a material containing Ru, and specifically, it is preferable to use Ru alone or use a Ru alloy. Examples of the Ru alloy can include an Ru alloy oxide such as Ru—SiO2, Ru—TiO2, Ru—ZrO2, or the like.
  • An average thickness of the second ground layer 132B may be thinner than that of an ground layer (for example, an ground layer containing Ru) in a general magnetic recording medium, and can be, for example, 1 nm or more to 5 nm or less. Since the seed layer 131 and the first ground layer 132A having the configurations described above are provided under the second ground layer 132B, even though the average thickness of the second ground layer 132B is thin as described above, a good SNR is obtained. Note that the average thickness of the second ground layer 132B is obtained in a manner similar to the magnetic layer 13 in the first embodiment. However, a magnification of a TEM image is appropriately adjusted according to the thickness of the second ground layer 132B.
  • (Effect)
  • In the magnetic recording medium 130 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to keep the width of the magnetic recording medium 10 constant or substantially constant by adjusting tension in a longitudinal direction of the magnetic recording medium 10, similar to the first embodiment.
  • The magnetic recording medium 130 according to the third embodiment includes the seed layer 131 and the first ground layer 132A between the base layer 111 and the second ground layer 132B. The seed layer 131 contains Cr, Ni, and Fe, and has a face-centered cubic lattice structure, and a (111) plane of the face-centered cubic structure is preferentially aligned so as to be parallel with a surface of the base layer 111. The first ground layer 132A has a column structure in which it contains Co and O, a ratio of an average atomic concentration of O to an average atomic concentration of Co is 1 or more, and an average particle diameter is 3 nm or more to 13 nm or less.
  • Therefore, it is possible to realize the magnetic layer 115 having a good crystal alignment and a high coercive force without using Ru, which is an expensive material, as thin as possible by reducing the thickness of the second ground layer 132B.
  • Ru contained in the second ground layer 132B has the same hexagonal closest-packed lattice structure as that of Co, which is a main component of the magnetic layer 115. Therefore, Ru has an effect of improving the crystal alignment of the magnetic layer 115 and promoting a granular property. Furthermore, in order to further improve the crystal alignment of Ru contained in the second ground layer 132B, the first ground layer 132A and the seed layer 131 are provided under the second ground layer 132B. In the magnetic recording medium 130 according to the third embodiment, an effect (function) substantially similar to that of the second ground layer 132B containing Ru is realized by the first ground layer 132A containing cheap CoO having the face-centered cubic lattice structure. Therefore, the thickness of the second ground layer 132B can be reduced. Furthermore, in order to improve the crystal alignment of the first ground layer 132A, the seed layer 131 containing Cr, Ni, and Fe is provided.
  • 5. Example
  • Hereinafter, the present technology will be specifically described by Examples, but the present technology is not limited to only these Examples.
  • In the following examples and comparative examples, the average thickness tT of the magnetic tape, the dimensional change amount Δw of the magnetic tape in the width direction with respect to a change in tension of the magnetic tape in the longitudinal direction, the thermal expansion coefficient α of the magnetic tape, the humidity expansion coefficient β of the magnetic tape, the Poisson's ratio ρ of the magnetic tape, the elastic limit value σMD of the magnetic tape in the longitudinal direction, the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer, the squareness ratio S2, the average thickness tb of the back layer, the surface roughness Rab of the back layer, the interlayer friction coefficient μ between the magnetic surface and the back surface, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value, the friction coefficient μ1, and the maximum value μ1M are values obtained by the measurement method described in the first embodiment. However, as described later, in Example 11, a speed V at the time of measuring an elastic limit value σMD in a longitudinal direction was set to a value different from the measurement method described in the first embodiment.
  • Example 1 (Process of Preparing Magnetic Layer-Forming Coating Material)
  • A magnetic layer-forming coating material was prepared as follows. First, a first composition of the following mixture was kneaded with an extruder. Next, the kneaded first composition and a second composition of the following mixture were added to a stirring tank equipped with a disperser and preliminary mixing was carried out. Subsequently, sand mill mixing was performed again and subjected to filtering to prepare a magnetic layer-forming coating material.
  • (First Composition)
  • Powder of ε iron oxide nanoparticles (ε-Fe2O3 crystal particles): 100 parts by mass
  • Vinyl chloride resin (30% by mass of a cyclohexanone solution): 10 parts by mass (containing a polymerization degree of 300, Mn=10000, OSO3K=0.07 mmol/g as a polar group, and secondary OH=0.3 mmol/g)
  • Aluminum oxide powder: 5 parts by mass
  • (α-Al2O3, average particle size 0.2 μm)
  • Carbon black: 2 parts by mass
  • (Manufactured by TOKAI CARBON CO., LTD, trade name: SEAST TA)
  • (Second Composition)
  • Vinyl chloride resin: 1.1 parts by mass
  • (Resin solution: 30% by mass of resin, 70% by mass of cyclohexanone)
  • n-Butyl stearate: 2 parts by mass
  • Methyl ethyl ketone: 121.3 parts by mass
  • Toluene: 121.3 parts by mass
  • Cyclohexanone: 60.7 parts by mass
  • Finally, 4 parts by mass of polyisocyanate (trade name: Coronate L, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Co., Ltd.) and 2 parts by mass of myristic acid were added as a curing agent to the magnetic layer-forming coating material prepared as described above.
  • (Process of Preparing Ground Layer-Forming Coating Material)
  • A ground layer-forming coating material was prepared as follows. First, a third composition of the following mixture was kneaded by an extruder. Next, the kneaded third composition and a fourth composition of the following mixture were added to a stirring tank equipped with a disper and preliminary mixing was carried out. Subsequently, sand mill mixing was further performed and the mixture was subjected to filtering to prepare a ground layer-forming coating material.
  • (Third Composition)
  • Needle-like iron oxide powder: 100 parts by mass
  • (α-Fe2O3, average major axis length 0.15 μm)
  • Vinyl chloride resin: 55.6 parts by mass
  • (Resin solution: 30% by mass of resin, 70% by mass of cyclohexanone)
  • Carbon black: 10 parts by mass
  • (Average particle size 20 nm)
  • (Fourth Composition)
  • Polyurethane resin UR8200 (manufactured by TOYO BOSEKI): 18.5 parts by mass
  • n-Butyl stearate: 2 parts by mass
  • Methyl ethyl ketone: 108.2 parts by mass
  • Toluene: 108.2 parts by mass
  • Cyclohexanone: 18.5 parts by mass
  • Finally, 4 parts by mass of polyisocyanate (trade name: Coronate L, manufactured by Nippon Polyurethane Co., Ltd.) and 2 parts by mass of myristic acid were added as a curing agent to the ground layer-forming coating material prepared as described above.
  • (Process of Preparing Back Layer-Forming Coating Material)
  • A back layer-forming coating material was prepared as follows. The following raw materials were mixed in a stirring tank equipped with a disper and subjected to filtering to prepare a back layer-forming coating material.
  • Carbon black (manufactured by Asahi Carbon Co., Ltd., trade name: #80): 100 parts by mass
  • Polyester polyurethane: 100 parts by mass
  • (Nippon Polyurethane Co., Ltd., trade name: N-2304)
  • Methyl ethyl ketone: 500 parts by mass
  • Toluene: 400 parts by mass
  • Cyclohexanone: 100 parts by mass
  • (Film Formation Process)
  • Using the coating material prepared as described above, a ground layer having an average thickness of 1.0 μm and a magnetic layer having an average thickness tm of 90 nm were formed on a long polyethylene naphthalate film (hereinafter referred to as “PEN film”) which is a nonmagnetic support in the following manner. First, the ground layer-forming coating material was applied to the film and dried to form a ground layer on the film. Next, a magnetic layer-forming coating material was applied to the ground layer and dried to form a magnetic layer on the ground layer. Note that, when the magnetic layer-forming coating material was dried, the magnetic powder was magnetically aligned in a thickness direction of the film by a solenoid coil. Furthermore, the squareness ratio S2 in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape was set to 65% by adjusting an application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer-forming coating material.
  • Subsequently, a back layer having an average thickness tb of 0.6 μm was applied to the film, on which the ground layer and the magnetic layer were formed, and dried. Then, the film, on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed, was subjected to a curing treatment. Subsequently, calendering was performed to smooth the surface of the magnetic layer. Here, conditions (temperature) for calendering were adjusted so that an interlayer friction coefficient μ of a magnetic surface and a back surface is about 0.5 and re-curing was subsequently performed to obtain a magnetic tape having an average thickness tT of 5.5 μm.
  • (Cutting Process)
  • The magnetic tape obtained as described above was cut into a ½ inch (12.65 mm) width and wound around a core to obtain a pancake.
  • The ½ inch-wide magnetic tape was wound around a reel prepared in the cartridge case to obtain a magnetic recording cartridge.
  • A servo signal was recorded on the magnetic tape by a servo track writer. The servo signal includes rows of inverted V-shaped magnetic patterns, and two or more rows of magnetic patterns are pre-recorded in parallel in the longitudinal direction at a known interval from each other (hereinafter referred to as a “known interval of magnetic pattern rows when pre-recorded”).
  • The magnetic tape obtained as described above had the characteristics shown in Table 1. For example, the dimensional change amount Δw of the magnetic tape was 707 ppm/N, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value was 23 nm, and μ1M was 0.05.
  • Example 2
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the PEN film was made thinner than in Example 1 so that the dimensional change amount Δw was 750 ppm/N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape. The average thickness tT of the magnetic tape was 5 μm, and the standard deviation σPES of the PES value was 17 nm.
  • Example 3
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the PEN film was thinner than Example 1 and the average thickness of the back layer and the ground layer was thinner so that the dimensional change amount Δw was 800 ppm/N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 4
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the PEN film was thinner than Example 1, the average thickness of the back layer and the ground layer was thinner, and the curing treatment conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed were adjusted so that the dimensional change amount Δw was 800 ppm/N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 5
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that the composition of the ground layer-forming coating material was changed so that the thermal expansion coefficient α was 8.0 ppm/° C. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 6
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that a thin barrier layer was formed on one side of the PEN film so that the humidity expansion coefficient β was 3.0 ppm/% RH. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 7
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that longitudinal and transverse stretching strengths of the base film were changed so that the Poisson's ratio ρ was 0.31. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 8
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4 except that the longitudinal and transverse stretching strengths of the base film were changed so that the Poisson's ratio ρ was 0.35. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 9
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the curing conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed were adjusted so that the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction was 0.8 N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 10
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the curing conditions and re-curing conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and back layer were formed were adjusted so that the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction was 3.5 N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 11
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in a manner similar to that of Example 9. Then, the elastic limit value σMD of the obtained magnetic tape was measured by changing the speed V when measuring the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction to 5 mm/min. As a result, the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction was 0.8, without any change as compared with the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction at a speed V of 0.5 mm/min (Example 9). As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 12
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that a coating thickness of the magnetic layer-forming coating material was changed so that the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer was 40 nm. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 13 (Film Formation Process of SUL)
  • First, a CrPtCoSiO2 layer (SUL) having an average thickness of 10 nm was formed on a surface of a long polymer film as a nonmagnetic support under the following film formation conditions. Note that a PEN film was used as the polymer film.
  • Film formation method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: CoZrNb target
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 0.1 Pa
  • (Process of Forming First Seed Layer)
  • Next, a TiCr layer (first seed layer) having an average thickness of 5 nm was formed on the CoZrNb layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Sputtering method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: TiCr target
  • Achieved vacuum: 5×10−5 Pa
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 0.5 Pa
  • (Process of Forming Second Seed Layer)
  • Next, a NiW layer (second seed layer) having an average thickness of 10 nm was formed on the TiCr layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Sputtering method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: NiW target
  • Achieved vacuum: 5×10−5 Pa
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 0.5 Pa
  • (Process of Forming First Ground Layer)
  • Next, a Ru layer (first ground layer) having an average thickness of 10 nm was formed on the NiW layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Sputtering method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: Ru target
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 0.5 Pa
  • (Process of Forming Second Ground Layer)
  • Next, a Ru layer (second ground layer) having an average thickness of 20 nm was formed on the Ru layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Sputtering method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: Ru target
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 1.5 Pa
  • (Process of Forming Magnetic Layer)
  • Next, a (CoCrPt)—(SiO2) layer (magnetic layer) having an average thickness of 9 nm was formed on the Ru layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Film formation method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: (CoCrPt)—(SiO2) target
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 1.5 Pa
  • (Process of Forming Protective Layer)
  • Next, a carbon layer (protective layer) having an average thickness of 5 nm was formed on the magnetic layer under the following film formation conditions.
  • Film formation method: DC magnetron sputtering method
  • Target: carbon target
  • Gas type: Ar
  • Gas pressure: 1.0 Pa
  • (Process of Forming Lubricating Layer)
  • Next, a lubricant was applied to the protective layer to form a lubricating layer.
  • (Process of Forming Back Layer)
  • Next, a back layer-forming coating material was applied to a surface opposite to the magnetic layer and dried to form a back layer having an average thickness tb of 0.3 μm. As a result, a magnetic tape having an average thickness tT of 4.0 μm was obtained.
  • (Cutting Process)
  • The magnetic tape obtained as described above was cut into a ½ inch (12.65 mm) width.
  • The magnetic tape obtained as described above had the characteristics shown in Table 1. For example, the dimensional change amount Δw of the magnetic tape was 800 ppm/N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 14
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the thickness of the back layer was changed to 0.2 μm. An average thickness of the magnetic tape was 4.4 μm. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 15
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the composition of the back layer-forming coating material was changed so that the surface roughness Rab of the back layer was 3 nm. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 16
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the conditions (temperature) of calendering were adjusted so that the friction coefficient μ was 0.20. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 17
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the composition of the back layer-forming coating material was changed so that the surface roughness Rab of the back layer is 3 nm, a condition (temperature) for calendaring was adjusted so that the friction coefficient μ was 0.80, and the amount of carbon black in the magnetic layer was reduced. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 18
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the coating thickness of the magnetic layer-forming coating material was changed so that the average thickness tm of the magnetic layer was 110 nm. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 19
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the composition of the back layer-forming coating material was changed so that the surface roughness Rab of the back layer was 7 nm. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 20
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the conditions (temperature) for calendering were adjusted so that the friction coefficient μ was 0.18. An μ1M of the magnetic tape was 0.04. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 21
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the conditions (temperature) for calendering were adjusted so that the friction coefficient μ was 0.82. The standard deviation σPES of the PES value of the magnetic tape was 18 nm and μ1M thereof was 0.45. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 22
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the squareness ratio S2 in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape was set to 73% by adjusting the application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer-forming coating material. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 23
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that the squareness ratio S2 in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape was set to 80% by adjusting the application time of the magnetic field to the magnetic layer-forming coating material. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 24
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the curing conditions and re-curing conditions of the film on which the ground layer, the magnetic layer, and the back layer were formed were adjusted so that the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction was 5 N. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Example 25
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7, except that barium ferrite (BaFe12O19) nanoparticles were used instead of ε iron oxide nanoparticles. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Comparative Example 1
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the stretching treatment of the PEN film was changed so that the dimensional change amount Δw was 650[ppm/N] and the winding tension in the coating process was increased. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Comparative Example 2
  • A magnetic tape on which a servo signal was recorded was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the structure of the write head of the servo track writer was changed.
  • Comparative Example 3
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the amount of carbon black in the magnetic layer was reduced. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • Comparative Example 4
  • A magnetic tape was obtained in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the amount of carbon black in the magnetic layer was increased. As in Example 1, a magnetic recording cartridge was manufactured using the magnetic tape and a servo signal was then recorded on the magnetic tape.
  • (Determination of Change Amount of Tape Width)
  • On the magnetic tape included in the magnetic recording cartridge, as described above, two or more rows of inverted V-shaped magnetic patterns are pre-recorded in the longitudinal direction at a known interval from each other (“the known interval of the magnetic pattern rows when pre-recorded”). The magnetic recording tape in each magnetic recording cartridge was reciprocated in the recording and reproducing apparatus. Then, at the time of reciprocation running, two or more rows of the above-mentioned inverted V-shaped magnetic pattern rows were simultaneously reproduced, and the interval between the magnetic pattern rows during running was continuously measured from a shape of a reproduction waveform of each row. Note that at the time of running, rotational driving of the spindle driving device and the reel driving device was controlled on the basis of the measured interval information of the magnetic pattern row to automatically adjust tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic tape so that the interval between the magnetic pattern rows becomes a prescribed width or substantially a prescribed width. A simple average of all measured values of one reciprocation of the interval of the magnetic pattern row is taken as “an interval of the measured magnetic pattern row”, and a difference between this and the “interval of the known magnetic pattern row when pre-recorded” was set to a “change in tape width”.
  • Furthermore, the reciprocation running by the recording and reproducing apparatus was performed in a constant temperature and humidity chamber. A speed of the reciprocation was 5 m/sec. A temperature and humidity during the reciprocation running were gradually and repeatedly changed according to a predetermined environmental change program in a temperature range of 10° C. to 45° C. and the relative humidity range of 10% to 80%, independent of the reciprocation running described above. The predetermined environmental change program may be, for example, that 10° C. and 10%→29° C. and 80%→10° C. and 10% are repeated twice. The temperature and humidity are changed from 10° C. and 10% to 29° C. and 80% in two hours and from 29° C. and 80% to 10° C. and 10% in two hours.
  • This evaluation was repeated until the “predetermined environmental change program” was finished. After the evaluation, an average value (simple average) was calculated using all the absolute values of each of the “change in tape width” obtained at each reciprocation, and the value was determined as an “effective change amount of tape width” of the tape. A determination was made on each tape according to deviation (the smaller the better) from an ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”, and eight-stage determination values were respectively given. Note that evaluation “8” indicated the most desirable determination result and evaluation “1” indicated the most undesirable determination result. The magnetic tape has certain evaluation of the 8 stages, and the following states are observed when the magnetic tape runs.
  • 8: No abnormality occurred
  • 7: A slight increase in error speed is observed when running
  • 6: A serious increase in error speed is observed when running
  • 5: During running, the magnetic tape may not read a servo signal and slight (one or two) reloading is performed
  • 4: During running, the magnetic tape may not read a servo signal and medium (up to 10 times) reloading is performed
  • 3: During running, the magnetic tape may not read a servo signal and heavy (more than 10 times) reloading is performed
  • 2: The magnetic tape may not read servo and occasionally stops due to a system error
  • 1: The magnetic tape may not read servo and immediately stops due to a system error
  • In addition, the magnetic tape, in a state of being loaded in the cartridge was kept for one week at 50° C. and 50% Rh environment, and the same determination was made again.
  • (Evaluation of Electromagnetic Conversion Characteristic)
  • First, a reproduction signal of the magnetic tape was acquired using a loop tester (manufactured by Microphysics). The conditions for acquiring the reproduction signal are described below.
  • Head: GMR
  • Headspeed: 2 m/s
  • Signal: single recording frequency (10 MHz)
  • Recording current: Optimal recording current
  • Next, the reproduction signal was adopted by a spectrum analyzer at a span (SPAN) of 0 to 20 MHz (resolution band width=100 kHz, VBW=30 kHz). Next, a peak of the adopted spectrum was taken as a signal amount S, floor noise without the peak was integrated to obtain a noise amount N, and a ratio S/N of the signal amount S to the noise amount N was obtained as a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). Next, the obtained SNR was converted into a relative value (dB) based on the SNR of Comparative Example 1 as a reference medium. Next, using the SNR (dB) obtained as described above, quality of an electromagnetic conversion characteristic was determined as follows.
  • Better: The SNR of the magnetic tape is 1 dB or more better than the SNR (=0 (dB)) of the evaluation reference sample
  • Comparative Example 1
  • Good: The SNR of the magnetic tape is equal to or exceeds the SNR (=0 (dB) of the evaluation reference sample (Comparative Example 1)
  • Almost good: There is a portion where the SNR of the magnetic tape is less than the SNR (=0 (dB)) of the evaluation reference sample (Comparative Example 1).
  • Bad: The SNR of the magnetic tape is less than the SNR (=0 (dB)) of the evaluation reference sample (Comparative Example 1) over the entire area.
  • (Evaluation of Winding Deviation)
  • First, a cartridge sample after the above-mentioned “determination of change amount of tape width” was prepared.
  • Next, the reel around which the tape was wound was taken out from the cartridge sample, and an end face of the wound tape was visually observed. Note that the reel has a flange, and at least one flange is transparent or translucent so that the internal tape winding can be observed over the flange.
  • According to results of observation, in a case where the end face of the tape is not flat and there is a step or protrusion of the tape, the tape was determined to have winding deviation. Furthermore, the “winding deviation” is considered to be worse as a plurality of steps and protrusions are observed. The above determination was made for each sample. The winding deviation state of each sample was compared with the winding deviation state of Comparative Example 1 as a reference medium, and the quality was determined as follows.
  • Good: In a case where the winding deviation state of the sample is equal to or less than the winding deviation state of the reference sample (comparative example 1)
  • Bad: In a case where the winding deviation state of the sample is larger than the winding deviation state of the reference sample (comparative example 1)
  • Table 1 shows the configurations and evaluation results of the magnetic tapes of Examples 1 to 25 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4.
  • TABLE 1
    tbs tT ΔW α β σMD V tm
    Magnetic Material (μm) [μm] (ppm/N) (ppm/° C.) (ppm/% RH) ρ (N) (mm/min) (nm)
    Example 1 ε Iron Oxide 3.8 5.5 707 5.9 5.2 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 2 ε Iron Oxide 3.3 5.0 750 5.9 5.2 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 3 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 5.9 5.2 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 4 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 5 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 8 5 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 6 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.6 800 6 3 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 7 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 8 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.35 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 9 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.8 0.5 90
    Example 10 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 3.5 0.5 90
    Example 11 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.8 5 90
    Example 12 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.4 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 40
    Example 13 CrPtCoSiO2 3.6 4.0 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 9
    Example 14 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.4 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 15 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 16 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 17 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 18 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 110
    Example 19 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 20 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 21 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 22 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 23 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 24 ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 5.0 0.5 90
    Example 25 BaFe 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Comparative ε Iron Oxide 3.8 5.5 650 5.9 5.2 0.29 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 1
    Comparative ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 2
    Comparative ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 3
    Comparative ε Iron Oxide 3.2 4.5 800 6 5 0.31 0.75 0.5 90
    Example 4
    Electromagnetic
    S2 tb Rab σPES Conversion Winding
    Alignment Degree [%] (μm) (nm) μ (nm) μ1M Determination Characteristics Deviation
    Example 1 Substantially Vertical 65 0.6 6 0.50 23 0.05 4 Good Good
    Example 2 Substantially Vertical 65 0.6 6 0.50 17 0.05 5 Good Good
    Example 3 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 19 0.05 6 Good Good
    Example 4 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.055 7 Good Good
    Example 5 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 6 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 8 Good Good
    Example 7 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 8 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 9 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 8 Good Good
    Example 10 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 8 Good Good
    Example 11 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 8 Good Good
    Example 12 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 13 Vertical 98 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 14 Substantially Vertical 65 0.2 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 15 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 3 0.50 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 16 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.20 20 0.05 7 Good Good
    Example 17 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 3 0.80 20 0.45 7 Good Good
    Example 18 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.05 7 Approximately Good
    Good
    Example 19 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 7 0.50 20 0.05 7 Approximately Good
    Good
    Example 20 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.18 20 0.04 7 Good Bad
    Example 21 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.82 18 0.045 7 Good Bad
    Example 22 Substantially Vertical 73 0.3 6 0.50 18 0.048 8 Good Good
    Example 23 Substantially Vertical 80 0.3 6 0.50 21 0.048 8 Better Good
    Example 24 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 19 0.045 8 Good Good
    Example 25 Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 18 0.045 7 Good Good
    Comparative Substantially Vertical 65 0.6 6 0.50 19 0.045 1 Good Good
    Example 1
    Comparative Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 28 0.005 1 Good Good
    Example 2
    Comparative Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.055 1 Good Good
    Example 3
    Comparative Substantially Vertical 65 0.3 6 0.50 20 0.003 1 Bad Good
    Example 4
  • Note that each symbol in Table 1 refers to the following measurement values.
  • tbs: Thickness of base layer (unit: μm)
  • tT: Thickness of magnetic tape (unit: μm)
  • Δw: Dimension change amount in the width direction of the magnetic tape with respect to a change in tension in the longitudinal direction of the magnetic tape (unit: ppm/N)
  • α: Thermal expansion coefficient of magnetic tape (unit: ppm/° C.)
  • β: Humidity expansion coefficient of magnetic tape (unit: ppm/% RH)
  • ρ: Poisson's ratio of magnetic tape
  • σMD: Elastic limit value in the longitudinal direction of magnetic tape (unit: N)
  • V: Speed for measuring elastic limit (unit: mm/min)
  • tm: Average thickness of magnetic layer (unit: nm)
  • S2: Squareness ratio (unit: %) in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the magnetic tape (unit: %)
  • tb: Average thickness of back layer (unit: μm)
  • Rab: Surface roughness of back layer (unit: nm)
  • μ: Friction coefficient between magnetic surface and back surface
  • σPES: Standard deviation of PES value (nm)
  • μ1M: Maximum value of friction coefficient between magnetic surface and LTO3 head
  • From the results shown in Table 1, the following can be seen.
  • In all of the magnetic tapes of Examples 1 to 25, the determination results of the change amount in tape width was 4 or more. (In other words, the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width” is small). Therefore, it can be seen that the magnetic recording medium according to the embodiment of the present technology is suitable for use in a recording and reproducing apparatus for adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction.
  • From the results of the determination of the change amounts of tape widths of Examples 1 to 25 and Comparative Example 1, it can be seen that the dimensional change amount Δw of the magnetic recording tape is 660 ppm/N or more, more preferably 700 ppm/N or more, even more preferably 750 ppm/N, still more preferably 800 ppm/N or more, and thus, the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the recording and reproducing apparatus for adjusting tension in the longitudinal direction (in particular, adjustment of the tape width by adjusting tension).
  • In a comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Example 2, in the magnetic tape of Example 7, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value was 20 nm and the determination result of the amount of change in the tape width was 7, whereas in the magnetic tape of Comparative Example 2, the standard deviation σPES of the PES value was 28 nm and the determination result of the change in the tape width was 1. From these facts, it can be seen that the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the above-mentioned recording and reproducing apparatus because the standard deviation σPES of the PES value is 25 nm or less, preferably 23 nm or less, more preferably 21 nm or less, and still more preferably 19 nm or less.
  • In a comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Example 3, μ1M of the magnetic tape of Example 7 was 0.4 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 7, whereas μ1M of the magnetic tape of Comparative Example 2 was 0.55 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 1. From these facts, it can be seen that the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the above-mentioned recording and reproducing apparatus because μ1M is 0.5 or less, preferably 0.48 or less, more preferably 0.45 or less, or still more preferably 0.42 or less.
  • In a comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Example 4, μ1M of the magnetic tape of Example 7 was 0.4 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 7, whereas μ1M of the magnetic tape of Comparative Example 2 was 0.04 and the determination result of the amount of change in tape width was 1. From these facts, it can be seen that the magnetic recording tape is more suitable for use in the above-mentioned recording and reproducing apparatus because μ1M is 0.04 or more, preferably 0.05 or more, and more preferably 0.30 or more.
  • Furthermore, from the comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Example 4, it can be seen that electromagnetic conversion characteristic is bad if μ1M is too low.
  • From the comparison between Example 7 and Comparative Examples 2 to 4, it can be seen that, by adjusting the standard deviation σPES of the PES value and μ1M, running stability in the recording and reproducing apparatus that adjusts tension of the magnetic recording medium in the longitudinal direction may be enhanced and suitability for use in the recording and reproducing apparatus may be improved. In addition, it can be seen that the electromagnetic conversion characteristic can be improved by adjusting μ1M.
  • From the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 3 to 6 and the like, the thermal expansion coefficient α is preferably 5.9 ppm/° C.≤α≤8 ppm/° C. from the viewpoint of suppressing the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”. Furthermore, from the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 3 to 6 and the like, it can be seen that the humidity expansion coefficient β is preferably β≤5 ppm/% RH from the viewpoint of suppressing the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”.
  • From the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 7, 9, 10, and the like, it can be seen that the elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction is 0.8 N σMD from the viewpoint of suppressing the deviation from the ideal of the “effective change amount of tape width”.
  • From the comparison of Examples 9 and 11, it can be seen that the elastic limit value σMD does not depend on the speed V when the elastic limit measurement is performed.
  • From the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 7 and 18, it can be seen that the thickness of the magnetic layer is preferably 100 nm or less, particularly 90 nm or less, from the viewpoint of improving electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • From the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 7, 15, 17 and 19, it can be seen that the surface roughness Rab of the back layer is preferably 3.0 nm Rab 7.5 nm from the viewpoint of improving electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • When the evaluation results of Examples 7, 16, 17, 20, and 21 are compared with each other, the friction coefficient μ is 0.18<μ<0.82, particularly 0.20≤μ≤0.80, more particularly, 0.20≤μ≤0.78, and still more particularly, 0.25≤μ≤0.75, from the viewpoint of suppressing winding deviation.
  • From the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 7, 22, and 23, it can be seen that the squareness ratio S2 of the magnetic tape in the vertical direction is preferably 73% or more, and particularly 80% or more, from the viewpoint of improving electromagnetic conversion characteristic.
  • From the comparison of the evaluation results of Examples 7, 25 and the like, it can be seen that evaluation results similar to those obtained using ε iron oxide nanoparticles as magnetic particles can be obtained even in a case where the barium ferrite nanoparticles are used as magnetic particles.
  • From the comparison of the results of Example 13 and other Examples, it can be seen that evaluation results similar to those of the coating type magnetic recording tape can be obtained even with the vacuum thin film type (sputter type) magnetic recording tape is used.
  • Although the embodiments and examples of the present technology have been specifically described above, the present technology is not limited to the above-described embodiments and examples, and various modifications may be made based on the technical idea of the present technology.
  • For example, the configurations, methods, steps, shapes, materials, and numerical values or the like in the above embodiments and examples are merely examples, and a configuration, a method, a step, a shape, a material and a numerical value or the like different therefrom may also be used. Furthermore, the chemical formulas of the compounds and the like are typical, and are not limited to the mentioned valences in case of the generic name of the same compound. Furthermore, the configurations, methods, steps, shapes, materials, and numerical values or the like of the above-described embodiments and examples may be combined without departing from the spirit of the present technology.
  • Furthermore, in this specification, the numerical value range indicated by “to” indicates the range including the numerical values mentioned before and after “to” as the minimum value and the maximum value, respectively. In the numerical range mentioned stepwise in this specification, the upper or lower limit of the numerical range of a certain stage may be replaced with the upper or lower limit of the numerical range of the other stage. The materials exemplified in this specification can be used alone or in combination of two or more, unless otherwise specified.
  • Note that the present technology can have the following configuration.
  • [1] A magnetic recording medium
  • which has a layer structure including a magnetic layer and a base layer, and
  • of which an average thickness tT is tT≤5.6 μm,
  • a dimensional change amount Δw in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw,
  • a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer,
  • a standard deviation σPES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal in which the servo pattern is reproduced is σPES≤25 nm, and
  • a maximum value μ1M of a friction coefficient μ1 between a surface on a side of the magnetic layer and an LTO3 head in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 is performed 250 times is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5.
  • [2] The magnetic recording medium described in [1], in which a squareness ratio of the magnetic recording medium in a vertical direction is 65% or more.
  • [3] The magnetic recording medium described in [1] or [2], in which the dimensional change amount Δw is 700 ppm/N≤Δw.
  • [4] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [3], in which the dimensional change amount Δw is 750 ppm/N≤Δw.
  • [5] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [4], in which the dimensional change amount Δw is 800 ppm/N≤Δw.
  • [6] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [5],
  • in which the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a surface roughness Rab of the back layer is 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm.
  • [7] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [6],
  • in which the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a friction coefficient μ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer is 0.20≤μ≤0.80.
  • [8] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [7], in which a thermal expansion coefficient α is 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient β is β≤5.5 ppm/% RH.
  • [9] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [8], in which a Poisson's ratio ρ is 0.25≤ρ.
  • [10] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [9], in which an elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction is 0.7 N≤σMD.
  • [11] The magnetic recording medium described in [10], in which the elastic limit value σMD does not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
  • [12] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [11], in which the magnetic layer is vertically aligned.
  • [13] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [12], in which the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness tb of the back layer is tb≤0.6 μm.
  • [14] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [13], in which the magnetic layer is a sputtered layer.
  • [15] The magnetic recording medium described in [14], in which an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
  • [16] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [1] to [13], in which the magnetic layer contains magnetic powder.
  • [17] The magnetic recording medium described in [16], in which an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 35 nm≤tm≤120 nm.
  • [18] The magnetic recording medium described in [16] or [17], in which the magnetic powder includes ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • [19] The magnetic recording medium described in [2], in which the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a surface roughness Rab of the back layer is 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm.
  • [20] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] or [19],
  • in which the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and a friction coefficient μ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer is 0.20≤μ≤0.80.
  • [21] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2], [19], and [20], in which a thermal expansion coefficient α is 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient β is β≤5.5 ppm/% RH.
  • [22] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] and [19] to [21], in which a Poisson's ratio ρ is 0.25≤ρ.
  • [23] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] and [19] to [21], in which an elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction is 0.7 N≤σMD.
  • [24] The magnetic recording medium described in [23], in which the elastic limit value σMD does not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
  • [25] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] and [19] to [24], in which the magnetic layer is vertically aligned.
  • [26] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] and [19] to [25],
  • in which the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness tb of the back layer is tb≤0.6 μm.
  • [27] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] and [19] to [26], in which the magnetic layer is a sputtered layer.
  • [28] The magnetic recording medium described in [27], in which an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
  • [29] The magnetic recording medium described in any one of [2] and [19] to [26], in which the magnetic layer contains magnetic powder.
  • [30] The magnetic recording medium described in [29], in which an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 35 nm≤tm≤120 nm.
  • [31] The magnetic recording medium described in [29] or [30], in which the magnetic powder includes ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
  • REFERENCE SIGNS LIST
    • 10 Magnetic recording medium
    • 11 Base layer
    • 12 Ground layer
    • 13 Magnetic layer
    • 14 Back layer

Claims (31)

1. A magnetic recording medium
which has a layer structure including a magnetic layer and a base layer, and
of which an average thickness tT is tT≤5.6 μm,
a dimensional change amount Δw in a width direction with respect to a change in tension in a longitudinal direction is 660 ppm/N≤Δw,
a servo pattern is recorded on the magnetic layer,
a standard deviation σPES of a position error signal (PES) value obtained from a servo signal in which the servo pattern is reproduced is σPES≤25 nm, and
a maximum value μ1M of a friction coefficient μ1 between a surface on a side of the magnetic layer and an LTO3 head in a case where measurement of the friction coefficient μ1 is performed 250 times is 0.04≤μ1M≤0.5.
2. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein a squareness ratio of the magnetic recording medium in a vertical direction is 65% or more.
3. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the dimensional change amount Δw is 700 ppm/N≤Δw.
4. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the dimensional change amount Δw is 750 ppm/N≤Δw.
5. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the dimensional change amount Δw is 800 ppm/N≤Δw.
6. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1,
wherein the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and
a surface roughness Rab of the back layer is 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm.
7. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1,
wherein the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and
a friction coefficient μ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer is 0.20≤μ≤0.80.
8. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein a thermal expansion coefficient α is 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient β is β≤5.5 ppm/% RH.
9. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein a Poisson's ratio ρ is 0.25≤ρ.
10. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein an elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction is 0.7 N≤σMD.
11. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 10, wherein the elastic limit value σMD does not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
12. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the magnetic layer is vertically aligned.
13. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and an average thickness tb of the back layer is tb≤0.6 μm.
14. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the magnetic layer is a sputtered layer.
15. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 14, wherein an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
16. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 1, wherein the magnetic layer contains magnetic powder.
17. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 16, wherein an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 35 nm≤tm≤120 nm.
18. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 16, wherein the magnetic powder includes ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
19. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2,
wherein the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and
a surface roughness Rab of the back layer is 3.0 nm≤Rab≤7.5 nm.
20. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2,
wherein the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and
a friction coefficient μ between a surface on the side of the magnetic layer and a surface on a side of the back layer is 0.20≤μ≤0.80.
21. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2, wherein a thermal expansion coefficient α is 5.5 ppm/° C.≤α≤9 ppm/° C., and a humidity expansion coefficient β is β≤5.5 ppm/% RH.
22. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2, wherein a Poisson's ratio ρ is 0.25≤ρ.
23. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2, wherein an elastic limit value σMD in the longitudinal direction is 0.7 N≤σMD.
24. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 23, wherein the elastic limit value σMD does not depend on a speed V at a time of measuring an elastic limit.
25. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2, wherein the magnetic layer is vertically aligned.
26. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2,
wherein the layer structure includes a back layer on a side of the base layer opposite to the side of the magnetic layer, and
an average thickness tb of the back layer is tb≤0.6 μm.
27. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2, wherein the magnetic layer is a sputtered layer.
28. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 27, wherein an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 9 nm≤tm≤90 nm.
29. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 2, wherein the magnetic layer contains magnetic powder.
30. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 29, wherein an average thickness tm of the magnetic layer is 35 nm≤tm≤120 nm.
31. The magnetic recording medium according to claim 29, wherein the magnetic powder includes ε iron oxide magnetic powder, barium ferrite magnetic powder, cobalt ferrite magnetic powder, or strontium ferrite magnetic powder.
US16/502,399 2019-04-26 2019-07-03 Magnetic recording medium Abandoned US20200342901A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/684,234 US10923148B2 (en) 2019-04-26 2019-11-14 Magnetic recording medium

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019086724A JP6590104B1 (en) 2019-04-26 2019-04-26 Magnetic recording medium
JP2019-086724 2019-04-26

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/684,234 Continuation US10923148B2 (en) 2019-04-26 2019-11-14 Magnetic recording medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20200342901A1 true US20200342901A1 (en) 2020-10-29

Family

ID=68234995

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/502,399 Abandoned US20200342901A1 (en) 2019-04-26 2019-07-03 Magnetic recording medium
US16/684,234 Active US10923148B2 (en) 2019-04-26 2019-11-14 Magnetic recording medium

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/684,234 Active US10923148B2 (en) 2019-04-26 2019-11-14 Magnetic recording medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US20200342901A1 (en)
JP (1) JP6590104B1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11170813B2 (en) * 2016-10-17 2021-11-09 Sony Corporation Magnetic powder, method of producing the same, and magnetic recording medium
US11244704B2 (en) 2019-09-17 2022-02-08 International Business Machines Corporation Magnetic recording tape having resilient substrate
US11302354B2 (en) * 2017-11-08 2022-04-12 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11302355B2 (en) * 2019-05-08 2022-04-12 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11302353B2 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-04-12 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11315596B2 (en) * 2019-09-17 2022-04-26 International Business Machines Corporation Magnetic recording tape fabrication method having peek substrate
US11315594B2 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-04-26 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11508408B2 (en) 2020-01-31 2022-11-22 Fujifilm Corporation Magnetic tape having characterized magnetic layer, magnetic tape cartridge, and magnetic tape apparatus
US11508407B2 (en) * 2018-03-30 2022-11-22 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional characteristics
US11514940B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2022-11-29 Fujifilm Corporation Magnetic recording medium and magnetic recording and reproducing device

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7207298B2 (en) * 2017-05-01 2023-01-18 ソニーグループ株式会社 magnetic recording medium
JP6590102B1 (en) * 2019-04-26 2019-10-16 ソニー株式会社 Magnetic recording cartridge
JP7351810B2 (en) * 2020-07-17 2023-09-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Magnetic tape, magnetic tape cartridges and magnetic tape devices
JP7531425B2 (en) 2021-02-26 2024-08-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Magnetic tape and magnetic tape container
JP2022170600A (en) 2021-04-28 2022-11-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Magnetic tape cartridge and magnetic recording playback device

Family Cites Families (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH03185623A (en) * 1989-12-13 1991-08-13 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Vapor deposition magnetic recording medium
JPH04255910A (en) * 1991-02-08 1992-09-10 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Magnetic recording tape
JP2002163816A (en) * 2000-09-18 2002-06-07 Victor Co Of Japan Ltd Magnetic tape
JP2005199724A (en) * 2000-12-05 2005-07-28 Teijin Ltd Biaxial oriented polyester film laminate and magnetic recording medium
JP3706947B2 (en) * 2001-03-12 2005-10-19 日立マクセル株式会社 Magnetic tape cartridge
JP3886968B2 (en) 2002-03-18 2007-02-28 日立マクセル株式会社 Magnetic recording medium and magnetic recording cartridge
US7238439B2 (en) 2003-02-19 2007-07-03 Hitachi Maxell, Ltd. Magnetic recording medium containing particles with a core containing a Fe16N2 phase
JP2005276258A (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-10-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Magnetic recording medium
JP2005346865A (en) * 2004-06-04 2005-12-15 Toray Ind Inc Magnetic recording medium
JP2006127602A (en) 2004-10-27 2006-05-18 Sony Corp Magnetic tape medium
JP2006236399A (en) 2005-02-22 2006-09-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Magnetic recording medium
JP2007250078A (en) * 2006-03-15 2007-09-27 Fujifilm Corp Magnetic recording medium
JP2007294079A (en) * 2006-03-29 2007-11-08 Fujifilm Corp Magnetic tape
US20070230054A1 (en) 2006-03-29 2007-10-04 Fujifilm Corporation Magnetic tape
JP2007287215A (en) * 2006-04-14 2007-11-01 Toray Ind Inc Support for magnetic recording medium and magnetic recording medium
US20080055777A1 (en) 2006-09-06 2008-03-06 Seagate Technology Llc Perpendicular magnetic recording media with improved scratch damage performance
JP2009054270A (en) * 2007-05-31 2009-03-12 Fujifilm Corp Magnetic recording medium, magnetic signal reproduction system and method
JP2009087471A (en) * 2007-09-28 2009-04-23 Fujifilm Corp Magnetic recording medium
JP2008159259A (en) * 2008-02-13 2008-07-10 Hitachi Maxell Ltd Magnetic recording medium
JP2010102818A (en) * 2008-09-29 2010-05-06 Fujifilm Corp Magnetic recording medium
EP2623294A4 (en) 2010-09-27 2015-12-16 Toray Industries Biaxially oriented polyester film and linear magnetic recording medium
WO2015198514A1 (en) * 2014-06-24 2015-12-30 ソニー株式会社 Magnetic recording medium
JP6465823B2 (en) * 2016-02-03 2019-02-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Magnetic tape and manufacturing method thereof
JP6585570B2 (en) 2016-09-16 2019-10-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Magnetic recording medium and method for manufacturing the same
US10102873B2 (en) * 2017-02-22 2018-10-16 International Business Machines Corporation Balanced delay and resolution for high density servo systems
JP6660336B2 (en) * 2017-03-29 2020-03-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Magnetic tape device and head tracking servo method
US11037592B2 (en) * 2017-12-07 2021-06-15 Toyobo Co., Ltd. Resin film with controlled youngs modulus

Cited By (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11170813B2 (en) * 2016-10-17 2021-11-09 Sony Corporation Magnetic powder, method of producing the same, and magnetic recording medium
US11302354B2 (en) * 2017-11-08 2022-04-12 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11508407B2 (en) * 2018-03-30 2022-11-22 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional characteristics
US11514940B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2022-11-29 Fujifilm Corporation Magnetic recording medium and magnetic recording and reproducing device
US11749304B2 (en) * 2019-03-29 2023-09-05 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11302353B2 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-04-12 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11315594B2 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-04-26 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US20220230660A1 (en) * 2019-03-29 2022-07-21 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11302355B2 (en) * 2019-05-08 2022-04-12 Sony Corporation Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
US11495259B2 (en) * 2019-09-17 2022-11-08 International Business Machines Corporation Fabrication methods for magnetic recording tape having resilient substrate
US11315596B2 (en) * 2019-09-17 2022-04-26 International Business Machines Corporation Magnetic recording tape fabrication method having peek substrate
US11244704B2 (en) 2019-09-17 2022-02-08 International Business Machines Corporation Magnetic recording tape having resilient substrate
US11508408B2 (en) 2020-01-31 2022-11-22 Fujifilm Corporation Magnetic tape having characterized magnetic layer, magnetic tape cartridge, and magnetic tape apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6590104B1 (en) 2019-10-16
US10923148B2 (en) 2021-02-16
US20200342902A1 (en) 2020-10-29
JP2020184389A (en) 2020-11-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11250884B2 (en) Magnetic recording cartridge
US11631430B2 (en) Magnetic recording medium
US10923148B2 (en) Magnetic recording medium
US11302354B2 (en) Magnetic recording medium having controlled dimensional variation
JP6610822B1 (en) Magnetic recording medium
US20200312365A1 (en) Magnetic recording medium
JP6610821B1 (en) Magnetic recording medium
JP6662488B1 (en) Magnetic recording cartridge
JP7226467B2 (en) magnetic recording medium
JP6680396B1 (en) Magnetic recording media
JP6733794B1 (en) Magnetic recording medium
JP6733798B1 (en) Magnetic recording medium
JP2020166923A (en) Magnetic recording medium
JP7226468B2 (en) magnetic recording medium
JP6677340B1 (en) Magnetic recording media
JP7247858B2 (en) magnetic recording medium
JP6677339B1 (en) Magnetic recording media

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

AS Assignment

Owner name: SONY CORPORATION, JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ENOMOTO, TAIKEI;TERAKAWA, MASARU;YAMAGA, MINORU;SIGNING DATES FROM 20190723 TO 20190724;REEL/FRAME:052539/0438

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION